মাৰ্কঃ 13:14
14 ১৪ দানিযেল্ভৱিষ্যদ্ৱাদিনা প্ৰোক্তং সৰ্ৱ্ৱনাশি জুগুপ্সিতঞ্চ ৱস্তু যদা ৎৱযোগ্যস্থানে ৱিদ্যমানং দ্ৰক্ষথ (যো জনঃ পঠতি স বুধ্যতাং) তদা যে যিহূদীযদেশে তিষ্ঠন্তি তে মহীধ্ৰং প্ৰতি পলাযন্তাং;
၁၄ပရောဖက် ဒံယေလ ဟော သည် အတိုင်း၊ ဖျက်ဆီး တတ်သော ရွံရှာဘွယ် အရာသည် မ နေသင့် သောအရပ် ၌ စိုက်နေ သည်ကို သင်တို့မြင် ရလျှင် ၊ ကျမ်းစာကိုကြည့် သောသူ သည် နားလည် ပါစေ။ ထိုသို့ မြင်ရလျှင် ယုဒ ပြည် ၌ ရှိသော သူ တို့သည်တောင် ပေါ်သို့ ပြေး ကြစေ။”
When
Strongs:
Greek:
ὅταν
Transliteration:
hotan
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
when(-ever)
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
when(-ever)
Tyndale
Word:
ὅταν
Transliteration:
hotan
Gloss:
when(-ever)
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
ὅταν (for ὅτ᾽ ἄν = ὅτε ἄν), temporal particle, with a conditional sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future; 1) prop, whenever; (a) (a) with subjc. praes: Mat.6:2, 5 Mrk.14:7, Luk.11:36, Jhn.7:27, Act.23:35, 1Co.3:4, al; ἕως τ. ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25; before τότε, 1Th.5:3; (b) with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185): Mat.5:11, Mrk.4:15, Luk.6:22, Jhn.2:10 8:28 (Field, Notes, 94), 10:4, al. 2) As in Hom. (LS, see word), but not in cl. prose, with indic, when (M, Pr., 167f; Bl, §65, 9): with impf, Mrk.3:11 (cf. Gen.38:9, al.); with praes, Mrk.11:25; with fut. Rev.4:9 (Swete, in l.); with aor, Mrk.11:19, Rev.8:1 (Swete, in ll; M, Pr., 168, 248; Field, Notes, 35). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὅταν
Transliteration:
hotan
Gloss:
when(-ever)
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
ὅταν, for ὅτ᾽ ἄν (ὅτε ἄν) as sometimes in codices: adverb of Time, A) whenever, with a conditional force, so as nearly to ={ἐάν} (see. εἰ [Refs 5th c.BC+], referring to an indefinite future [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also of events like ly to recur,[Refs]: also in Epic dialect ὅτε κεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated for rhetorical effect, ὅ. ὡς ὑβρίζων, ὅ. ὡς ἐχθρὸς ὑπάρχων, ὅ. κονδύλοις, ὅ. ἐπὶ κόρρης [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.b) later causal, since, ὅταν. ᾖ since it is, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in earlier examples the application to the particular case is less directly expressed, καὶ τοῦτο τυφλὸν ὅταν ἐγὼ βλέπω βραχύ this too (i.e. my staff) is blind when I am (= when its owner is) short-sighted, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.2) never with indicative in early authors, except in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently in LXX with imperfect indicative, as ὅταν εἰσήρχετο [LXX+2nd c.BC+]: also with aorist indicative, [LXX+NT]: with future indicative, ὅταν ἕξουσι [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ὅταν ὄψεσθε (variant{ὄψησθε}) [NT]: with present indicative, ὅταν δείκνυται [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.3) never with optative in early authors, except in indirect speech, where in orat. recta the subjunctive with ὅταν would have stood, as perhaps [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅτε κεν followed by ἵκοι, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II) Special usages: A.II.1) to introduce a simile,[Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.2) πρίν γ᾽ ὅ, ={πρίν γε ἢ ὅ}. (see. ὅτε [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.II.3) εἰς ὅτε κεν until such time as, [Refs] A.II.4) ὅ. τάχιστα, Latin cum primum, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ὅταν
Transliteration:
hótan
Pronounciation:
hot'-an
Language:
Greek
then
Strongs:
Lexicon:
δέ
Greek:
δὲ
Transliteration:
de
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
but/and
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
de
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf, Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; 1) copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2 ff, 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ. δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. 2) Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop, answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl, §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
de
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
δέ, but: adversative and copulative Particle, I) answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) without preceding μέν, II.1) adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) copulative, II.2.a) in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν [Refs] II.2.b) in enumerations or transitions, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with repetition of a word in different relations, ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in rhetorical outbursts, οὐκ ἂν εὐθέως εἴποιεν· τὸν δὲ βάσκανον, τὸν δὲ ὄλεθρον, τοῦτον δὲ ὑβρίζειν,—ἀναπνεῖν δέ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in a climax, πᾶν γύναιον καὶ παιδίον καὶ θηρίον δέ nay even beast, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in the combination καὶ δέ [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2.c) answering to τε (which see), ἃ τῶν τε ἀποβαινόντων ἕνεκα ἄξια κεκτῆσθαι, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον αὐτὰ αὑτῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) implying causal connexion, less direct than γάρ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.4) in questions, with implied opposition, ἑόρακας δ᾽, ἔφη, τὴν γυναῖκ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4.b) τί δ; what then? to mark a transition in dialogue; see at {τίς}. II) in apodosi: II.1) after hypothetical clauses, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.1.b) after temporal or relative clauses, with ἐπεί, ἕως, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with demonstrative Pronouns or adverbs answering to a preceding relative, οἵηπερ φύλλων γενεή, τοίη δὲ καὶ ἀνδρῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: sometimes after a participle, οἰόμενοι. τιμῆς τεύξεσθαι, ἀντὶ δὲ τούτων οὐδ᾽ ὅμοιοι. ἐσόμεθα [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) to resume after an interruption or parenthesis, χρόνου δὲ ἐπιγινομένου καὶ κατεστραμμένων σχεδὸν πάντων,—κατεστραμμένων δὲ τούτων. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with an anacoluthon, ἡ δὲ ψυχὴ ἄρα,—οἷ ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ. τῇ ἐμῇ ψυχῇ ἰτέον, αὕτη δὲ δή. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) to begin a story, ἦμος δ᾽ ἠέλιος. well, when the sun, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.4) to introduce a proof, τεκμήριον δέ, σημεῖον δέ, (see entry). B) POSITION of δέ. It usually stands second: hence frequently between Article and substantive or preposition and case; but also after substantive, or words forming a connected notion, hence it may stand third, γυναῖκα πιστὴν δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις εὕροι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose after a negative, οὐχ ὑπ᾽ ἐραστοῦ δέ, to avoid confusion between οὐ δέ and οὐδέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
dé
Pronounciation:
deh
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
but, and, etc.; also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English); a primary particle (adversative or continuative)
you may see
Strongs:
Lexicon:
εἴδω
Greek:
ἴδητε
Transliteration:
idēte
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to perceive
Morphhology:
Verb 2nd Aorist Active Subjunctive 2nd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that maybe happened - by persons being spoken or written to
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
to perceive, see
Tyndale
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eidō
Gloss:
to perceive: see
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, which see), [in LXX chiefly for ידע;] pf. with present meaning (plpf. as impf; on irregular tense-forms, see App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.25:13, Mrk.10:19, Jhn.10:4, Rom.7:7, al; with accusative of person(s), Mat.26:72, Jhn.1:31, Act.3:16, al; τ. θεόν, 1Th.4:5, Tit.1:16, al; with accusative and inf, Luk.4:41, al; before ὅτι, Mat.9:6, Luk.20:21, Jhn.3:2, Rom.2:2 11:2, al; before quaest. indir, Mat.26:70, Jhn.9:21, Eph.1:18, al; with inf, to know how (cl.), Mat.7:11, Luk.11:13, Php.4:12, 1Th.4:4, al; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 1Th.5:12 (but see also ICC on 1Th.4:4). SYN.: see: γινώσκω. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eidō
Gloss:
to perceive: see
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
εἴδω, no active present in use, ὁράω being used:—middle, see.below [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εἶδον always in sense of see (so in present and aorist 1 middle, to be seen, i.e. seem): but perfect οἶδα, in present sense, know. (With ἔ-ϝιδον, compare (ϝ) είδομαι, (ϝ) εῖδος, Latin videre; with (ϝ) οῖδα, cf. Sanskrit véda, Gothic wait, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] wát 'know'.) A) aorist 2 εἶδον (late εἶδα [Refs 5th c.AD+]aorist to ὁράω, Epic dialect ἴδον, iterative ἴδεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Aeolic dialect εὔιδον [Refs]; imperative ἴδε (in Attic dialect written as adverb ἰδέ, behold! Hdn.Gr.2.23), ἴδετ; subjunctive ἴδω, Epic dialect ἴδωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative ἴδοιμ; infinitive ἰδεῖν, Epic dialect ἰδέει; participle ἰδών: hence, future ἰδησῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+] —middle, aorist 2 εἰδόμην, Epic dialect ἰδόμην, in same sense, poetry, Ionic dialect, and later Prose (with genitive, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; imperative ἰδοῦ (frequently written as adverb ἰδού, ={ἰδέ}); subjunctive ἴδωμα; optative ἰδοίμη; infinitive ἰδέσθα; participle ἰδόμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] 1) see, perceive, behold, ὀφθαλμοῖσι or ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσι ἰδέσθαι see before the eyes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄγε, πειρήσομαι ἠδὲ ἴδωμαι well, I will try and see, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; mark, observe, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in infinitive after substantive or adjective, θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι a marvel to behold, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 1.b) see a person, i.e. meet him, speak with him, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 1.c) see, i.e. experience, νόστιμον ἦμαρ ἰδέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλόχου κουριδίης. οὔ τι χάριν ἴδε he saw (i.e. enjoyed) not the favour of his wedded wife, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) look, ἰδεῖν ἐς. look at or towards, [Refs]; πρός. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι look him in the face, [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb or adjective, ὑπόδρα ἰδών looking askance, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀχρεῖον ἰδών looking helpless, [Refs]; κέρδος ἰδεῖν look to gain, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 3) see mentally, perceive, ἰδέσθαι ἐν φρεσίν 'to see in his mind's eye', [Refs 8th c.BC+] 3.b) examine, investigate, [Refs]; consider, ἴδωμεν τί λέγομεν [Refs] II) middle, present εἴδομαι, Epic dialect ἐείδεται [Refs 3rd c.BC+], participle ἐειδόμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist εἰσάμην, Epic dialect participle ἐεισάμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—only Epic dialect and Lyric poetry, to be seen, appear, εἴδεται ἄστρα they are visible, appear,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; perhaps also οὔ πῃ χροὸς εἴσατο none of the skin was visible, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) with infinitive, appear or seem to be, τὸ δέ τοι κὴρ εἴδεται εἶναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with infinitive omitted, οἱ τό γε κέρδιον εἴσατο θυμῷ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, look like or make a show of, εἴσατ᾽ ἴμεν ἐς Λῆμνον he made a show of going to Lemnos, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴσατο δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε ῥινόν it had the look as of a shield, [Refs] II.3) strictly middle, with dative, εἴσατο φθογγὴν Πολίτῃ she made herself like Polites in voice, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: especially in participle, like, εἰδομένη κήρυκι [Refs 8th c.BC+] B) perfect, οἶδα I know, used as present: pluperfect ᾔδεα (see. below), I knew, used as imperfect:—perfect οἶδα, Aeolic dialect ὄϊδα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular οἶδας once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἶσθα elsewhere in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect, etc; in Comedy texts also sometimes οἶσθας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; plural, ἴσμεν, Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Doric dialect ἴδμεν, also Ionic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴστε, ἴσασι [ῐς- [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἴδαμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] were formed Doric dialect 1st pers. singular ἴσᾱμι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἴσατι [Refs]; 1st pers. plural ἴσᾰμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect 3rd.pers. plural subjunctive ἴθθαντι [Refs]; infinitive ϝισάμην[Refs]; participle ἴσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]subjunctive εἰδῶ (εἰδέω, ἰδέω, [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural εἰδέωσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect also εἴδω [Refs 8th c.BC+], 1st pers. plural εἰδεῖμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: infinitive εἰδέναι, Epic dialect ἴδμεναι, ἴδμεν, also ἰδέμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: participle εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, Epic dialect also ἰδυῖα, Elean ϝειζώς [Refs]:—pluperfect ᾔδεα [Refs 8th c.BC+], contraction ᾔδη [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently in codices, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also later Attic dialect, accusative to [Refs 5th c.BC+] (variant -εις, - ει), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Attic dialect also 1st pers. singular ᾔδειν [Refs 4th c.BC+], 2nd pers. singular ᾔδεις [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ᾐδέατε [LXX+6th c.BC+]; late Epic dialect ᾔδειν, ἠείδειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἴσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—future, in this sense, εἴσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive εἰδησέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] —The aorist and perfect are usually supplied by γιγνώσκ; aorist 1 infinitive εἰδῆσαι is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural subjunctive εἰδήσωσιν Herzog Koische Forschungen No.[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—know, have knowledge of, be acquainted with, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νοήματα, μήδεα οἶδε, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρῶτος ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν the first we know of, [Refs 5th c.BC+] know well, be assured of this, [Refs 8th c.BC+] adjective, to express character or disposition, ἄγρια οἶδε has fierceness in his heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀθεμίστια ᾔδη had law lessness in his heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴ μοι ἤπια εἰδείη if he were kindly disposed towards me, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with genitive, ὃς σάφα θυμῷ εἰδείη τεράων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόξων ἐῢ εἰδώς cunning with the bow,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί acknowledge a debt to another, thank him,[Refs 5th c.BC+] be Zeus my witness, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἴττω Ἡρακλῆς etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle εἰδώς, absolutely, one who knows, one acquainted with the fact, ἰδυίῃ πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also ἰδυίῃσι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.2) with infinitive, know how to do, οἶδ᾽ ἐπὶ δεξιά, οἶδ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερὰ νωμῆσαι βῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, to be in a condition, be able, have the power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of drugs, ὅσα λεπτύνειν οἶδε [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of a festival, οἶδε ἐκπέμπουσα δάκνειν Chor.p.124 [Refs 5th c.BC+]; learn, ἵν᾽ εἰδῇ μὴ 'πὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς κακοῖς ὑψηλὸς εἶναι [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) with participle, to know that such and such is the fact, the participle being in nominative when it is a predicate of the Subject of the Verb, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in accusative when it is predicate of the Object, τοὺς φιλτάτους γὰρ οἶδα νῷν ὄντας πικρούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle omitted, γῆν αὐτὰ οἶδεν ἀμφότερα (i.e. ὄντα) [Refs 4th c.AD+] B.4) less frequently c.accusative et infinitive, πλήθους. ἂν σάφ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ ἕκατι βάρβαρον ναυσὶν κρατῆσαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with accusative followed by ὡς, ὅτι, etc, οἶδα κἀμαυτὴν ὅτι ἀλγῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἰ. I know not whether, to express disbelief or doubt, sometimes with ἄν transposed, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμί σε [Refs 5th c.BC+] perhaps no other, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) in similar ellipses with other Conjunctions, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως I know not how, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.8) οἶδα, ἴσθι are frequently parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι δ᾽ ἄκων οὐχ ἑκοῦσιν, οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (i.e. πάρειμι) I know it well, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, frequently in [Refs 5th c.BC+] —οἶσθ᾽ ὅ, οἶσθ᾽ ὡς, with _imperative_, are common in Trag. and Comedy texts, οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δρᾶσον; do—thou know'st what, i.e. make haste and do, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς πόησο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οἶσθ᾽. ὡς νῦν μὴ σφαλῇ; [Refs]; οἶσθα νῦν ἅ μοι γενέσθ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]future, οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δράσεις (nisileg. δρᾶσον); [Refs]
Strongs > g1492
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eídō
Pronounciation:
i'-do
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
used only in certain past tenses, the others being borrowed from the equivalent g3700 (ὀπτάνομαι) and g3708 (ὁράω); properly, to see (literally or figuratively); by implication, (in the perfect tense only) to know; be aware, behold, X can (+ not tell), consider, (have) know(-ledge), look (on), perceive, see, be sure, tell, understand, wish, wot; a primary verb
the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τὸ
Transliteration:
to
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
abomination
Strongs:
Greek:
βδέλυγμα
Transliteration:
bdelugma
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a neuter PERSON OR THING that is having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
βδέλυγμα
Transliteration:
bdelugma
Gloss:
abomination
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
βδέλυγμα, -τος, τό (βδελύσσω), [in LXX chiefly for שֶׁקֶץ,תּוֹעֵבָה;] an abomination, a detestable thing: Luk.16:15, Rev.17:4, 5 21:27; τὸ β. τ. ἐρημώσεως (Dan LXX 12:11, cf. 1Ma.1:54; DB, i, 12f; DCG, i, 6f.), Mrk.13:14, Mat.24:15 (Cremer, 138). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
βδέλυγμα
Transliteration:
bdelugma
Gloss:
abomination
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
Strongs
Word:
βδέλυγμα
Transliteration:
bdélygma
Pronounciation:
bdel'-oog-mah
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Neuter
Definition:
a detestation, i.e. (specially) idolatry; abomination; from g948 (βδελύσσω)
of the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τῆς
Transliteration:
tēs
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Genitive Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC female person or thing that something belongs to
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
desolation
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἐρήμωσις
Greek:
ἐρημώσεως
Transliteration:
erēmōseōs
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
devastation
Morphhology:
Noun Genitive Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a female PERSON OR THING that something belongs to
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἐρήμωσις
Transliteration:
erēmōsis
Gloss:
devastation
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
ἐρήμωσις, -εως, ἡ (ἐρημόω), [in LXX for שָׁמֵם, שָׁמֵם, Lev.26:34-35, Psa.73:10, Dan.9:27 11:31 12:11, al; חׇרְבָּה, Jer.7:34 22:5, al;] a making desolate, laying waste: Luk.21:20; βδέλυγμα ἐρημώσεως (Da, ll. with, 1Ma.1:54), Mat.24:15 " (LXX), Mrk.13:14. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἐρήμωσις
Transliteration:
erēmōsis
Gloss:
devastation
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
ἐρήμ-ωσις, εως, ἡ, making desolate, [LXX+2nd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ἐρήμωσις
Transliteration:
erḗmōsis
Pronounciation:
er-ay'-mo-sis
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Feminine
Definition:
despoliation; desolation; from g2049 (ἐρημόω)
which
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τὸ
Transliteration:
to
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Additional:
[that] which
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
having been spoken of
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἔπω, ἐρῶ, εἶπον
Greek:
ῥηθὲν
Transliteration:
rhēthen
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to say
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Passive Participle Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
an ACTION that was done to a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἐρῶ
Origin:
a Form of g2036
Transliteration:
erō
Gloss:
to say
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
λέγω, [in LXX very freq, chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al;] 1) in Hom, to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. 2) In Hdt. and Att, to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol, Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir, Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al; before ὅτι recit, Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al; accusative and inf, Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir, Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al; with prep, πρός, μετά, περί, etc, Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass, Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι, δια- (-μαι), προ, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr, Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἐρῶ
Origin:
a Form of g2036
Transliteration:
erō
Gloss:
to say
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἐρῶ, Attic dialect future of εἴρω (B), [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐρέω (later as present, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; optative ἐροίην [Refs 5th c.BC+]imperfect ἤρεον (variant{εἴρεον}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect active εἴρηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect εἰρήκειν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, perfect εἴρημαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural εἰρέαται [Refs 5th c.BC+], contraction εἰρῆται [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἰρημένος, Cretan dialect ϝερημένος [Refs]: pluperfect εἴρητο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 passive ἐρρήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ῥηθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] mostly in 3rd.pers. singular -ήσεται[Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle -όμενος[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἐρέω, 3rd.pers. singular perfect and pluperfect passive, with participle εἰρημένος, aorist participle ῥήθείς in the phrase ἐπὶ ῥηθέντι δικαίῳ (see. below), and future passive —The place of the present εἴρω (which see) is supplied by φημί, λέγω or ἀγορεύ; εἶπον serves as aorist (ϝερε: ϝρη, compare ῥήτρα, ῥητός, Latin verbum, Engl. word.) I) I will say or speak, with accusative of things et dative person, [Refs 8th c.BC+] he will say nothing against it, [Refs]; ἐν δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐρέω among you,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in Attic dialect, ἐρεῖν τι πρός τινα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι περί τινος [Refs]: with accusative person, speak of, κακῶς ἐρεῖν τινα [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—passive, μῦθος.εἰρημένος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λίαν εἰρημένος too true, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ ῥηθέντι δικαίῳ after justice has been pronounced, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον εἰρήσθω περί τινος let this suffice, [Refs 4th c.BC+] II) I will tell, proclaim, ἔπος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἠὼς.Ζηνὶ φόως ἐρέουσα announce it,[Refs 7th c.BC+] II.2) tell, order, with dative person et infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative et infinitive, [Refs]:—passive, εἴρητο συλλέγεσθαι τὸν στρατόν orders had been given, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) passive, to be mentioned, οὗτοι μὲν οἱ παραθαλάσσιοι. εἰρέαται [Refs 4th c.BC+] III.2) to be specified, agreed, promised, εἰρημένος μισθός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰρημένον, absolutely, when it had been agreed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κὰ (τ) τὰ ϝεϝρημένα [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
ἐρέω
Transliteration:
eréō
Pronounciation:
er-eh'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
by
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὑπό
Greek:
ὑπὸ
Transliteration:
hupo
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
by/under
Morphhology:
Preposition
Grammar:
relating it to another person or thing
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Additional:
by/under, by
Tyndale
Word:
ὑπό
Transliteration:
hupo
Gloss:
by/under: by
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
ὑπό (before smooth breathing ὑπ᾽, Mat.8:9 b, Luk.7:8 b; before rough breathing ὑφ᾽, Rom.3:9; on the neglect of elision in Mt, Lk, ll. witha, Gal.3:22, see WH, App., 146; Tdf, Pr., iv), prep. with genitive, dative (not in NT), accusative I. C. genitive, primarily of place, under, hence, metaphorically, of the efficient cause, by: after passive verbs, with genitive of person(s), Mat.1:22, Mrk.1:5, Luk.2:18, Jhn.14:21, Act.4:11, 1Co.1:11, Heb.3:4, al; with genitive of thing(s), Mat.8:24, Luk.7:24, Rom.3:21, al; with neut. verbs and verbs with pass, meaning, Mat.17:12, Mrk.5:26, 1Co.10:9, 10 1Th.2:14, al. II. C. accusative, under; 1) of motion: Mat.5:15 8:8, Mrk.4:21, Luk.13:34; hence, metaphorically, of subjection, Rom.7:14, 1Co.15:27, Gal.3:22, 1Pe.5:6, al. 2) Of position: Jhn.1:49, Act.4:12, Rom.3:13, 1Co.10:1, al; hence, metaphorically, under, subject to, Mat.8:9, Rom.3:9, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5, al. 3) Of time, about: Act.5:21. III. In composition: under (ὑποδέω), hence, of subjection (ὑποτάσσω), compliance (ὑπακούω), secrecy (ὑποβάλλω), diminution (ὑποπνέω). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὑπό
Transliteration:
hupo
Gloss:
by/under: by
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
ὑπό [ῠ], preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative: Aeolic dialect ὐπά [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ὑπά Ἀρχ.Δελτ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ηυπύ only in [Refs 5th c.BC+] ὁπύ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in Epic dialect ὑπαί (also [Refs 5th c.BC+]: this is found in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only six times as a well-attested reading (ὑ. πόδα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere (before λ ν ρ ϝ) it is weakly attested as see l. for ὑπὸ (?~X ¯), e.g. ποσσὶ δ᾽ ὑπὸ (variant{ὑπαὶ}) λιπαροῖσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ὑπαὶ νεφέων is given by most codices in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; it is not frequently in Trag. Poets, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ὕπο) cf. Sanskrit úpa 'towards, near to, etc.', Gothic uf 'under'.) A) WITH GENITIVE, A.I) of Place, with Verbs of motion, from under, αὖτις ἀναστήσονται ὑ. ζόφου they will rise again from under the gloom, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐσιδόντες ὑπαὶ χειμῶνος αἴγλαν from under the storm-cloud, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially of rescuing from under another's power, after the Verbs ἐρύεσθαι, ἁρπάζειν, ῥύεσθαι, ἐρύειν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]from the consequences of, [Refs]; also ἵππους μὲν λῦσαν ὑ. ζυγοῦ from under the yoke,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπ᾽ ἀρνειοῦ λυόμην I loosed myself from under the ram, [Refs]; σπλάγχνων ὕπο ματέρος μόλεν, i.e. was born, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; rarely in Trag, ὑ. πτερῶν σπάσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare ὑπέκ. A.I.2) of the object under which a thing is or is placed, under, beneath, with collateral sense of motion, as μοχλὸν ὑ. σποδοῦ ἤλασα πολλῆς thrust it in under the embers, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also without the sense of motion, ὑπ᾽ ἀνθερεῶνος ὀχεὺς τέτατο [Refs 8th c.BC+] = under takes genitive in Attic dialect, accusative in 'Hellenic' Greek; κατακρύψας ὑ. κόπρου, which is variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+] is called by [Refs]; but in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is almost limited to these and a few other phrases, especially ὑ. γῆ; it is not found at all in [LXX+5th c.BC+], Ptolemaic papyri, and NT; [Refs 5th c.BC+] (= from under) [Refs]; the Orators have only ὑ. μάλης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. γῆς is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ὑ. τῆς γῆς), [Refs] A.I.2.b) metaphorically, ἀρετῶσι δὲ λαοὶ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ under his rule, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II) of Cause or Agency, frequently with passive Verbs, and with intransitive Verbs in passive sense, μή πως τάχ᾽ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ δουρὶ δαμήῃς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εὖτ᾽ ἂν πολλοὶ ὑφ᾽ Ἕκτορος θνῂσκοντες πίπτωσι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλύοντές ἐσμεν αἰσχίστους λόγους. τοῦδ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἀνδρὸς ἀρτίως we have been called shameful names by, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κακῶς ὑ. τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκούειν to be ill spoken of by, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a subordinate agent, ὑ. κήρυκος προαγορεύειν, ἀπειπεῖν κηρύκων ὕπο, [Refs 5th c.BC+] substantive, τὸ ὑ. νόμου ἐπίταγμα (i. e. ἐπιταττόμενον)[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἄτρωτον ἦν ὑ. στύγους (={οὐ τετρωμένον}) probably in [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.II.2) also in pregnant phrases, not only of the immediate act of the agent, but also of its further result, ὅθ᾽ ὑ. λιγέων ἀνέμων σπέρχωσιν ἄελλαι hasten driven on by them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑφ᾽ Ἕκτορος. φεύγοντες fleeing before him,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔπαινον, αἰτίαν ἔχειν ὑ. τινῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) frequently of things as well as persons, ὡς διάκειμαι ὑ. τῆς νόσου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χαλεπῶς ἔχειν ὑ. τραυμάτων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατεσκεύασαν τὰς πύλας κλείεσθαι ὑ. σφύρας τε μεγάλης καὶ κτύπου παμμεγέθους γιγνομένου [Refs 4th c.BC+]: of the agency of feelings, passions, etc, ἀνόρουσ᾽ ὑ. χάρματος [Refs]; ἐνδακρύειν, ἀνολολύξαι χαρᾶς ὕπο, [Refs 8th c.BC+] from courage, i. e. impelled by courage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδὲ σέ γε δόλος ἔσχ᾽ ὑ. χειρὸς ἐμᾶς by my agency, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰ μήτις αὐτὸς δοίη, μὴ ὑπ᾽ ἀνάγκας not under compulsion, [Refs] A.II.4) ὑπό frequently serves to denote the attendant or accompanying circumstances, νέφος ἐρχόμενον κατὰ πόντον ὑ. Ζεφύροιο ἰωῆς [Refs 8th c.BC+]participle added, ἀμφὶ δὲ νῆες σμερδαλέον κονάβησαν ἀϋσάντων ὑπ᾽ Ἀχαιῶν at their shouting, i.e. when they shouted, [Refs] A.II.5) of accompanying music, to give the time, κώμαζον ὑπ᾽ αὐλοῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally, of anything attendant, δαΐδων ὕ. λαμπομενάων ἠγίνεον by torchlight, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπ᾽ εὐφήμου βοῆς θῦσαι offer a sacrifice accompanied by it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. φανοῦ πορεύεσθαι by lantern-light, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. πομπῆς ἐξάγειν τινά in or with solemn procession, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. βίης βήξας coughing with violence, violently, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐτόξευον ὑ. μαστίγων, i.e. they shot and lashed, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.6) ὑ. Ἑλλανοδικᾶν, ={ἐπί} with genitive, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.II.7) in Mathematics texts, ἡ ὑ. ΘΔΗ the angle ΘΔΗ (={ἡ ὑ. τῶν ΘΔ, ΔΗ περιεχομένη γωνία}), [Refs 5th c.AD+]; but also τὸ ὑ. τῶν ΑΓ, ΓΒ the rectangle contained by ΑΓ, ΓΒ, ={ΑΓ χ ΓΒ}, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.II.8) ναῦλον ὄνων γ εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὑ. οἴνου laden with wine, Papyrus in [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B) WITH DATIVE (especially in Poets, never in [LXX] or NT, not common in [Refs 4th c.BC+], of Position under, ὑ. ποσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. Τμώλῳ at its foot,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῶν θανόντων ὑπ᾽ Ἰλίῳ under its walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ηυπὺ τῇ κλίνῃ τούτῃ ληνὸς (or Λῆνος) ηύπυ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στρουθοὶ ὑ. τῇ τραπέζῃ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὑ. τῇ μασχάλῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὑ. τῇ γῇ ἀήρ under the earth, [Refs]; ἐὰν ὑ. σοὶ κατακλινῇ lies next below you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑφ᾽ ἅρμασι under, i.e. yoked to, the chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τά τε θηρία καὶ τὰς ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῖς σχεδίας under them, on which they stood, [Refs 4th c.BC+] “*Deff.” 135.12; ὑ. τῷ δέρματι [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B.2) with Verbs of motion, where rest or position follows, εἷσαν ὑ. φηγῷ set [him] down under it, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) in such phrases as ὑ. χερσί τινος ἁλῶναι, δαμῆναι, [Refs]; ἐμῇς ὑ. χερσὶ δάμασσον [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.4) behind, ὑ. φάλαγγι [Refs 1st c.BC+]; under the cover or protection of, ὑ. τούτῳ τῷ φράγματι τοὺς ὑπορύσσοντας εἶναι [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.II) of the person under whose hand, power, or influence, or the thing by or through which a thing is done, ὑπ᾽ Ἀργείοισι φέβοντο fled before them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀτῆθαι ὑ. τῷ μεμφομένῳ [Refs]; ὁ χρησμὸς ὁ γεγονὼς ὑ. τοῖ Ἀπόλλωνι [Refs] B.II.2) expressing subjection or dependence, ὑ. τινί under one's power, δέδμητο δὲ λαὸς ὑπ᾽ αὐτῷ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἶναι ὑ. τισί to be subordinate, subject to them, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. Χείρωνι τεθραμμένος under the eye of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχειν ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ have under one, at one's command, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in pregnant sense, ἵνα. πάντα ὑ. Πέρσῃσι γένηται [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.3) of the subordination of things coming under a class, αἱ ὑ. ταῖς τέχναις ἐργασίαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.4) as in [Refs 4th c.BC+] advanced to the music of the flute-player, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπ᾽ αὐλῷ, ὑ. κήρυκι καὶ θεολόγῳ, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: generally, of attendant circumstances, ἐξ ἁλὸς εἶσι. πνοιῇ ὕπο Ζεφύροιο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. ῥάβδοις καὶ πελέκεσι κατιών escorted by the lictors, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ὑ. σκότῳ, νυκτί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. πολλῷ στρατῷ escorted by a great host, [Refs 5th c.BC+] — ὑπό has no sense with dative which it has not also with genitive; but all its senses with genitive do not belong to the dative:—later ὑπό with dative is found as a mere periphrastic of the dative, στέφος. αὐτὸς ὑφ᾽ ἡμετέραις πλεξάμενος παλάμαις [Refs 3rd c.BC+] C) WITH ACCUSATIVE, of Place; to express motion towards and under an object, ὑ. σπέος ἤλασε μῆλα drove them under, i.e. into, the cave, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ᾽ ὑ. γαῖαν, i.e. shall die, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατακρύπτειν τινὰ ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν θύρην under shelter of it, i.e. behind it, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of coming close up under a lofty citadel, ἤλθεθ᾽ ὑ. Τροίην up to T, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. ταὐτὸ στέγος εἰσελθεῖν [Refs]; πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν ἔλθῃ. ὑ. τὴν ῥάβδον [LXX]; so ὑ. δικαστήριον ὑπαχθείς, ἀγαγόντες, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.2) of Position or Extension under an object, without sense of motion, Ἀρκαδίην ὑ. Κυλλήνης ὄρος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀνθέντω ὑ. τὸν ναὸν τᾶς Δάματρος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὅσσοι ἔασιν ὑπ᾽ ἠῶ τ᾽ ἠέλιόν τε everywhere under the sun, [LXX+8th c.BC+]; τὸ ὑ. τὴν ἀκρόπολιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. γῆν is more frequently than ὑ. γῆς in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; it is found also in [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὑ. γῆν the nadir, opposed to μεσουράνημα, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; also ἄγχε δέ μιν. ἱμὰς ἁπαλὴν ὑ. δειρήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐλὴ ὑπ᾽ ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὑ. τὸ μέρος τοῦ ἐνοφειλομένου ὑπογραψάτω ὅσον ἰδίᾳ ἔχει [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κείμενος ὑ. τὸν ὀμφαλόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καταψύξατε ὑ. τὸ δένδρον [LXX]; ὑ. τὸν λέβητα[LXX]; ὑ. τοὺς πόδας[LXX+1st c.AD+]; ἡ ὑ. πόδα (i.e. γραμμή) the base of a triangle, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] “*Mens.” 55; also ὑπ᾽ αὐγὰς. λεύσσουσαι πέπλους holding them up to the light, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν close to the eye, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: of subordinate position. κατακλίνεσθαι ὑ. τινά [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τίς ὑ. τίν; who is next to whom, [Refs 1st c.AD+] C.2.b) in Mathematics texts, ὁ κύβος ὁ ὑ. τὴν. σφαῖραν inscribed in the sphere, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ὑ. τὰν αὐτὰν γωνίαν subtending, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] C.3) of the logical subordination of things under a class, τῶν ἑτερογενῶν καὶ μὴ ὑπ᾽ ἄλληλα τεταγμένων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἱ ὑ. τὸ ψεῦδος τεταγμένοι in the category of, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C.II) of subjection, control, dependence, never in [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc. (see. ἥλιος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τοῦ τοπαρχοῦντος ὑ. σέ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; στρατενσάμενον ὑ. ἄρχοντα Ἀντίοχον [Refs]; μηδὲ ὑ. δεσπότην ὤν [LXX]; for ὑ. χεῖρα, see at {χεί; οἱ ὑ. τινά} [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.III) of Time, in the course of, during, or to be left untranslated in English, ἐκέλευε Τοωσὶ ποτὶ πτόλιν ἡγήσασθαι νύχθ᾽ ὕ. τήνδ᾽ ὀλοήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα ἀπέδρη[LXX]: rarely with stress on the duration, πάνθ᾽ ὑ. μηνιθμόν throughout its continuance, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν τῶν κατ᾽ Αἴγυπτον ὑ. ταῦτα ἑτεροιωθῆναι during that time, [Refs] C.III.2) also of Time, about, sometimes more precisely at, and of events, about or at the time of, ὑπ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν χρόνον ὅτε. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑφ᾽ ἕνα καιρόν at one time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. τὴν ἑωθινήν, ὑ. τὴν ὄρφνην, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς περιπάτους ὑ. τὸ ψῦχος in the cool of the morning, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὑφ᾽ ἓν πάντες all at once, at the same time, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; παιδάριον ὑ. τὴν ἀναπνοὴν ἑπτὰ καὶ πέντε στίχους συνεῖρον in one breath, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὑφ᾽ ἓν ἐκτρῖψαι at one blow, [LXX]; ὑ. μίαν ἄρσιν καὶ θέσιν ἀνατείνοντες καὶ κατατιθέμενοι, of a squad of diggers, [Refs]; ὑ. μίαν φωνήν Aristeas 178; πῶς γὰρ ἂν ὑ. τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας ἔν τε τῇ Ἰταλίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Κιλικίᾳ. πολεμήσει; at the same time, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; sometimes with participle, ὑ. τὸν νηὸν κατακαέντα at the time of its burning, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. τὴν κατάλυσιν τοῦ πολέμου just at the end, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. τὸν θυμὸν ἐκ χειρὸς ἐπιστρατευσαμένων at the very time of their anger, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; παραδόντω τοῖς αἱρεθεῖσι εἰς τὸν ὑπ᾽ αὐτὰ (or ὕπαυτα as adverb ={ἑξῆς}) ἐνιαυτόν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὑ. κύνα [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.IV) of accompaniment, ὑπὸ ὄρχησίν τε καὶ ᾠδήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑ. κήρυκα (see. κῆρυξ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.IV.2) ὄνον ἕνα ὑ. λαχανόσπερμον laden with, Meyer [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ὄνοι ὑ. δένδρα [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; compare above [Refs 4th c.BC+] D) POSITION: ὑ. can follow its substantive, becoming by anastrophe ὕπο. It is frequently separated from the substantive by intervening words, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —ὑπαί is placed after its case in [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) AS adverb, under, below, beneath, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially of young animals, under the mother, i.e. at the breast, [Refs 8th c.BC+] E.2) behind, [Refs 5th c.BC+] E.II) ὑπ᾽ ἐκ or ὑπέκ, see at {ὑπέκ}.—In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the separation of the preposition from its Verb by tmesis is very frequently, and sometimes it follows, in which case it suffers anastrophe, φυγὼν ὕπο νηλεὲς ἦμαρ [Refs 8th c.BC+] F) IN COMPOSITION (joined with other words): F.I) under, as well of rest as of motion, as in ὕπειμι, ὑποβαίνω, etc. F.I.2) of the casing or covering of one thing with another, as ὑπάργυρος, ὑπόχρυσος. F.I.3) of the agency or influence under which a thing is done, to express subjection or subordination, ὑποδαμνάω, ὑποδμώς, ὑφηνίοχος, compare ἐπί [Refs] F.II) denoting what is in small degree or gradual, somewhat, a little, as in ὑποκινέω, ὑποδεής, ὑπόλευκος (so in tmesi, ὑ. τι ἀσεβῆ [Refs 5th c.BC+] F.III) underhand, secretly, as in ὑποθέω, ὑποθωπεύω, ὑποκορίζομαι, ὑπόρνυμι.
Strongs > g5259
Word:
ὑπό
Transliteration:
hypó
Pronounciation:
hoop-o'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Preposition
Definition:
under, i.e. (with the genitive case) of place (beneath), or with verbs (the agency or means, through); (with the accusative case) of place (whither (underneath) or where (below) or time (when (at)); among, by, from, in, of, under, with; a primary preposition
Daniel
Strongs:
Lexicon:
Δανιήλ
Greek:
Δανιὴλ
Transliteration:
Daniēl
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Genitive Singular Masculine Individual
Grammar:
a male PERSON that something belongs to
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Additional:
Daniel @ Ezk.14.14
Tyndale
Word:
Δανιήλ
Origin:
the Greek of h1840G
Transliteration:
Daniēl
Gloss:
Daniel
Morphhology:
Proper Name Noun Male Person
Definition:
Δανιήλ, ὁ, indecl. (Heb. דָּנִיֵּאל, God is my Judge), Daniel, the prophet: Mat.24:15. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
Δανιήλ
Origin:
the Greek of h1840G
Transliteration:
Daniēl
Gloss:
Daniel
Morphhology:
Proper Name Noun Male Person
Definition:
Δανιήλ, ὁ, indecl. (Heb. דָּנִיֵּאל, God is my Judge), Daniel, the prophet: Mat.24:15. (From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)
Strongs
Word:
Δανιήλ
Transliteration:
Daniḗl
Pronounciation:
dan-ee-ale'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Masculine
Definition:
Daniel, an Israelite; Daniel; of Hebrew origin (h1840)
<the>
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοῦ
Transliteration:
tou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Genitive Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC male person or thing that something belongs to
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
prophet
Strongs:
Lexicon:
προφήτης
Greek:
προφήτου
Transliteration:
prophētou
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Genitive Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a male PERSON OR THING that something belongs to
Source:
[Tag=K] Present in KJV sources, absent in Nestlé-Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
προφήτης
Transliteration:
prophētēs
Gloss:
prophet
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
προφήτης, -ου, ὁ [πρόφημι, to speak forth), [in LXX chiefly for נָבִיא;] one who acts as an interpreter or forth-teller of the Divine will (see Lft, Notes, 83f; Tr, Syn., §vi), a prophet; 1) in cl. (Æsch, Hdt, Plat, al.), of the interpreters of oracles. 2) In NT, (a) of the OT prophets: Mat.5:12, Mrk.6:15, Luk.4:27, Jhn.8:52, Rom.11:3, al; (b) of prophets in general: Mat.10:41 13:57 21:46, Mrk.6:4, Luk.13:33, al; (with) of John the Baptist: Mat.21:26, Mrk.6:15, Luk.1:76; (d) of Christ: Mat.21:11, Jhn.6:14, Act.3:22, 23 7:37 " (LXX); (e) of Christian prophets in the apostolic age: Act.15:32, 1Co.12:28, Eph.2:20, al; (f) by meton, of the writings of prophets: Luk.24:27, Act.8:28, al; (g) of a poet: Tit.1:12 (on the use of the term in π. and Inscr, see Deiss, BS, 235f; MM, xxii). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
προφήτης
Transliteration:
prophētēs
Gloss:
prophet
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
προφήτ-ης, ου, Doric dialect and Boeotian dialect προφάτας [ᾱ], α, [Refs 6th c.BC+] (πρό, φημί):— properly one who speaks for a god and interprets his will to man, Διὸς π. interpreter, expounder of the will of Zeus, of Tiresias, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Βάκχου π, perhaps of Orpheus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Διονύσου] π, of the Bacchae, [Refs]; Νηρέως π, of Glaucus, [Refs]; especially of the Delphic Apollo, Διὸς π. ἐστὶ Λοξίας πατρός [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of the minister and interpreter at Delphi, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; at the Ptoön,[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; compare προφῆτις. 2) title of official keepers of the oracle at Branchidae, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; elsewhere, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] 2.b) in Egyptian temples, member of the highest order of the clergy, priest, π. θεῶν Εὐεργετῶν [Refs 3rd c.BC+] 3) interpreter, expounder of the utterances of the μάντις (which see), [Refs 5th c.BC+] 4) possessor of oracular powers, of Amphiaraus, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of Pseudo-Bacis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Epimenides, [NT] 5) generally, interpreter, declarer, ἐγὼ π. σοι λόγων γενήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἀτόμων, of the Epicureans, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τῶν Πύρρωνος λόγων, of Timon, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; spokesman, [LXX] 5.b) metaphorically, proclaimer, harbinger, κώμου προφάτας, of the wine-bowl, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) herald at the games, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) in LXX, revealer of God's will, prophet, [LXX] III.2) in NT, inspired preacher and teacher, organ of special revelations from God, [NT]; and (as comprised in this), III.2.b) foreteller, prophet of future events, [NT] III.3) herbalist, Ps.-[Refs 1st c.AD+]; quack doctor, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
προφήτης
Transliteration:
prophḗtēs
Pronounciation:
prof-ay'-tace
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Masculine
already standing
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἵστημι
Greek:
ἑστηκότα
Transliteration:
hestēkota
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to stand
Morphhology:
Verb Perfect Active Participle Accusative Singular Masculine
Grammar:
an ACTION that was happening - done by a male person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=N(k)(o)] Present in Nestlé-Aland sources, minor variants in KJV and other sources
Variations:
Additional:
standing
Tyndale
Word:
ἵστημι
Transliteration:
histēmi
Gloss:
to stand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, see word; Bl, §23, 2; M, Pr., 55), [in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni, hi, יצב hith, etc.]. I. Trans, in pres, impf, fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass. 1) to make to stand, to place, set, set up, establish, appoint: with accusative of person(s), Mrk.7:9, Act.1:23 6:13 17:31, Heb.10:9; id. before ἐπί, with accusative loc, Mat.4:5, Luk.4:9; ἐν μέσῳ, Mat.18:2, Mrk.9:36, Jhn.8:[3]; ἐνώπιον, Act.6:6; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Luk.9:47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mat.25:33; mid, to place oneself, to stand: Rev.18:15; so also pass, to be made to stand, to stand: Mat.2:9, Luk.11:18 19:8, 2Co.13:1, al. 2) to set in a balance, to weigh (cl; LXX for שׁקל, Isa.46:6, al.): Mat.26:15, II. Intrans, in pf, plpf. (with sense of present and impf; M, Pr., 147f.) and 2 aor. act, to stand, stand by, stand still: Mat.20:32 26:73, Mrk.10:49, Luk.8:44, Jhn.1:35 3:29, Act.16:9, al; before ἐν, Mat.6:5, al; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:30, al; πρός, with dative loc, Jhn.18:16; ἐπί, with genitive loc, Luk.6:17, Act.5:23 25:10, al; ἔμπροσθεν, Mat.27:11; κύκλῳ, Rev.7:11; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Luk.1:11; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.13:2, Rev.3:20; παρά, Luk.5:2; ἐκεῖ, Mrk.11:5; ὧδε, Mrk.9:1; ὅπου, Mrk.13:14; ἔξω, Mat.12:46; μακρόθεν, Luk.18:13; πόρρωθεν, Luk.17:12. Metaphorical, to stand ready, stand firm, be steadfast: 1Co.7:37 10:12, Eph.6:11, 13 14, Col.4:12; τ. πίστει, Rom.11:20; ἐν τ. ἀληθείᾳ, Jhn.8:44; εν τ. χάριτι, Rom.5:2; ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ, 1Co.15:1 (cf. ἀν, ἐπ-ἀν, ἐξ-ἀν, ἀνθ, ἀφ, δι, ἐν, ἐξ, ἐπ- (-μαι), ἐφ, κατ-ἐφ, συν-ἐφ, καθ, ἀντι-καθ, ἀπο-καθ, μεθ, παρ, περι, προ, συν-ίστημι). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἵστημι
Transliteration:
histēmi
Gloss:
to stand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἵστημι (compare ἱστάω, ἱστάνω), I) causal, make to stand, imperative ἵστη [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἵστην, Epic dialect ἵστασκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἵσταν [Refs 5th c.BC+]future στήσω, Doric dialect στᾱσῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔστησα, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἔστᾰσαν for ἔστησαν uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 middle ἐστησάμην (never intransitive)[Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect ἕστᾰκα [LXX+5th c.BC+]; also ἕστηκα (see. below) in transitive sense, (δι-) [LXX+4th c.BC+] [same place]; ἑστακεῖα transitive in [Refs] II) intransitive, stand, II.1) active, aorist 2 ἔστην, Epic dialect στάσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστησαν, more frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative στῆθι, Doric dialect στᾶθι [Refs 7th c.BC+]subjunctive στῶ, Epic dialect [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural στέωμεν (as disyllable)[Refs]; optative σταῖεν, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural σταίησαν [Refs]; infinitive στῆναι, Epic dialect στήμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect στᾶμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle στάς: perfect ἕστηκα: pluperfect ἑστήκειν, sometimes with strengthened augment εἱστήκειν, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. singular ἑστήκεε [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect are preferred, ἕστᾰτον, ἕστᾰμεν, ἕστᾰτε, ἑστᾶσι [Refs 6th c.BC+]; imperative ἕστᾰθι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἑστ; optative ἑσταίη; infinitive ἑστάναι, Epic dialect ἑστάμεν, ἑστάμεναι (ἑστηκέναι only late, as [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; participle ἑστώς (ἑστηκώς rare in early Gr, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but συνεστηκυιῶν probably in [Refs 5th c.BC+] frequently variant as in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; genitive ἑστῶτο; Ionic dialect ἑστεώς, ἑστεός, ῶτο; Epic dialect ἑστηώς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative plural ἑστηῶσι conjecture in [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἑστάτην, ἕστᾰμεν, ἕστᾰτε, ἕστᾰσαν: late present ἑστήκω, formed from perfect, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: hence, future ἑστήξω [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) passive, ἵσταμαι: imperative ἵστασο [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἱστάμην: future στᾰθήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἐστάθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; rarely ἔστην, Doric dialect 3rd.pers. singular ἔσστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect ἕσταμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] sthā-, cf. Sanskrit sthā- (aorist á-sthā-t), Latin stare, etc; Gr. reduplicate present and perfect from si-sthā, se-sthā.) A) Causal, make to stand, set up, πελέκεας ἑξείης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔγχος μέν ῥ᾽ ἔστησε φέρων πρὸς κίονα he set it against the pillar,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἱ. ἱστόν set up the loom, or raise the mast (see. ἱστός [Refs]; κρητῆρας στήσασθαι to have bowls set up, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θεοῖς. κρητῆρα στήσασθαι in honour of the gods, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στῆσαί τινα ὀρθόν, στ. ὀρθὰν καρδίαν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στῆσαι λόγχας, for battle, [Refs]; especially raise buildings, statues, trophies, etc, ἱ. ἀνδριάντα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱ. τινὰ χαλκοῦν set him up in brass, raise a brazen statue to him, [Refs 4th c.BC+] (so in perfect, stand, οὗτος ἕστηκε λίθινος [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, σφυρήλατος ἐν Ὀλυμπία στάθητι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) set, place, of things or persons, τρίποδ᾽ ἔστασαν ἐν πυρί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; fix, τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς εἰς τὴν γῆν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; especially set men in order or array, πεζοὺς δ᾽ ἐξόπιθε στῆσεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) bring to a standstill, stay, check, λαὸν δὲ στῆσον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νέας, ἵππους, ἡμιόνους στῆσαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μύλην στῆσαι to stop the mill, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στῆσε δ᾽ ἐν Ἀμνισῷ (i.e. νῆα)[Refs 4th c.AD+]; στῆσαι τὴν φάλαγγα halt it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στ. τὰ ὄμματα fix them, of a dying man, [Refs]; στ. τὸ πρόσωπον compose the countenance, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς κοιλίας Philotim. cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, ἱστάμενος τῷ νοσήματι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) set on foot, stir up, κονίης. ἱστᾶσιν ὀμίχλην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of battle, etc, φυλόπιδα στήσειν stir up strife, [Refs 8th c.BC+] the fray is on foot, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —also in middle, στησάμενοι δ᾽ ἐμάχοντο[Refs 8th c.BC+] arises, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also of passions and states of mind, μῆνιν, ἐλπίδα στῆσαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) set up, appoint, τινὰ βασιλέα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, ἐστάσαντο τύραννον [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—passive, ὁ ὑπὸ Δαρείου σταθεὶς ὕπαρχος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.4) establish, institute, χορούς, παννυχίδα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στῆσαι χορόν, Ὀλυμπιάδα, ἑορτάν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐχ ὑγιῶς ἱστάμενος λόγον setting up a bad argument, [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, ἀγορὴ ἵσταταί τινι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.5) = Latin statuere, determine, γνῶναι καὶ στῆσαι [Refs 1st c.BC+]:—passive, τὰ ὑπό τινος σταθέντα [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τὰ ἑσταμένα Wilcken [Refs 2nd c.BC+] A.III.6) fix by agreement, ὁ σταθεὶς τόκος [Refs 1st c.BC+]; τὸ ἑσταμένον ἐνοίκιον [Refs 3rd c.AD+] A.III.7) bring about, cause, ἀμπνοάν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στῆσαι δύσκηλον χθόνα make its case desperate, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.IV) place in the balance, weigh, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [ἐκπώματα] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱστάναι τι πρὸς ἀργύριον weigh a thing against silver, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀγαθὸς ἱστάναι good at weighing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐγγὺς καὶ τὸ πόρρω στήσας ἐν τῷ ζυγῷ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ τὸ ἱστάναι ἐλθεῖν have recourse to the scales, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἵστασθαι ἐπὶ ζυγοῦ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]weighed, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.IV.2) weigh out, pay, [LXX+NT] B) passive and intransitive tenses of active, to be set or placed, stand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀντίοι ἔσταν, ἐναντίοι ἔστησαν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: proverbial of critical circumstances, ἐπὶ ξυροῦ ἵσταται ἀκμῆς [Refs 8th c.BC+], to be in a certain place or state, ἀργύρεοι σταθμοὶ ἐν χαλκέῳ ἕστασαν οὐδῷ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἑστάτω for ἔστω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ νῦν ἑστῶτα,= τὰ νῦν, [Refs] adverb, ξυμφορᾶς ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν, ἵν᾽ ἕστ. χρείας, in what case or need we are, [Refs]; ποῦ τύχης ἕστηκε; [Refs]; later also ἀδίκως, ὀρθῶς, εὐλαβῶς ἵστασθαι, behave wrongly, etc, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] B.2) take up an intellectual attitude, ὡς ἵστασθαι δεῖ περὶ χρημάτων κτήσεως [Refs 1st c.BC+]; οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἵ. [Refs] B.3) in pregnant sense, στῆναι ἐς. [Refs 8th c.BC+] those who did not face the danger, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) stand still, halt, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε δὴ στέωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc; stand idle, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἑστάναι to be stationary, opposed to κινεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ μὴν ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἕστηκε τὸ πρᾶγμα does not rest here, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐὰν ἡ κοιλία στῇ if the bowels are constipated, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with participle, οὐ στήσεται ἀδικῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; come to a stop, rest satisfied, ἄν τις ὀρθῶς ἐπιβάλῃ, ἔπειτα σταθῇ [Refs 4th c.BC+] there is a stop, one comes to a stop, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.II.2) metaphorically, stand firm, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of arguments or propositions, hold good, [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle, ἑστηκώς fixed, stable, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; λογισμὸς ἑστὼς καὶ νουνεχής [Refs 2nd c.BC+] adverb ἑστηκότως, opposed to στοχαστικῶς[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἑστηκότα θεωρήματα, ἑστηκότες σκοποί, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of age, ἑστηκυῖα ἡλικία [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τιμαὶ ἑστηκυῖαι fixed prices, PTeb.unpublished[Refs] B.III) to be set up or upright, stand up, rise up, κρημνοὶ ἕστασαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a horse, ἵστασθαι ὀρθός to rear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵστασθαι βάθρων from the steps, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.2) to be set up, erected, or built, στήλη, ἥ τ᾽ ἐπὶ τύμβῳ ἑστήκῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; see above [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.III.3) generally, arise, begin, ἵστατο νεῖκος [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.III.4) in marking Time, ἔαρος νέον ἱσταμένοιο when spring is not long begun, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἕβδομος ἑστήκει μείς the seventh month was begun, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῦ μὲν φθίνοντος μηνός, τοῦ δ᾽ ἱσταμένοιο as one month ends and the next begins, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later μὴν ἱστάμενος, μεσῶν, φθίνων, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.5) to be appointed, στῆναι ἐς ἀρχήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; see above [Refs 4th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ἵστημι
Transliteration:
hístēmi
Pronounciation:
stah'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to stand (transitively or intransitively), used in various applications (literally or figuratively); abide, appoint, bring, continue, covenant, establish, hold up, lay, present, set (up), stanch, stand (by, forth, still, up); a prolonged form of a primary (of the same meaning, and used for it in certain tenses)
where
Strongs:
Greek:
ὅπου
Transliteration:
hopou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
where(-ever)
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
where(-ever)
Tyndale
Word:
ὅπου
Transliteration:
hopou
Gloss:
where(-ever)
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
ὅπου adv. of place, correlat. of ποῦ (which see), where. I. Prop, of place, 1) where; (a) in relative sentences, with indic: Mat.25:24, 26, Mrk.2:4 4:5, 15 5:40 13:14, Jhn.3:8 6:62 7:34, 36 11:32 14:3 17:24 20:19, Rom.15:20, Rev.2:13; after nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (ἐν ᾧ, etc.), Mat.6:19-20 13:5 26:57 28:6, Mrk.6:55 9:48 Luk.12:33, Jhn.1:28 4:20, 46 6:23 7:42 10:40 11:30 12:1 18:1, 20 19:18, 20 19:41 20:12, Act.17:1, Rev.2:13 11:8 20:10; before ἐκεῖ, Mat.6:21, Luk.12:34 17:37 Jhn.12:26; id. pleonast. (= Heb. שָׁם. אֲשֶׁר; Aram. תַּמָּן. דּ; of. Gen.13:3), ὅ. ἐκεῖ, Rev.12:6, 14; ὅ. ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Rev.17:9; ὅ. ἄν, wherever (M, Pr., 168), with imperfect indic, Mrk.6:56; with Pres. subjc, Mat.24:28; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.26:13, Mrk.6:10 9:18 14:9, 14 a; (b) in quaest. indir, with aor. subjc: Mrk.14:14 b, Luk.22:11. 2) In late writers (sometimes also in cl; Bl, § 25, 2), with verbs of motion, = ὅποι, whither: with indic, Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 21:18, Heb.6:20, Jas.3:4; ὅ. ἄν, whithersoever, with present ind, Rev.14:4; subjc, Luk.9:57; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.8:19. II. Without strict local sense, 1) of time or condition: Col.3:11, Heb.9:16 10:18, Jas.3:16, 2Pe.2:11. 2) Of cause or reason (AV, whereas): 1Co.3:3. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὅπου
Transliteration:
hopou
Gloss:
where(-ever)
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
ὅπου, Ionic dialect ὅκου, Relat, indirect interrogative, and indefinite adverb of Place, correlated to ποῦ: I) as a Relat, sometimes with genitive loci, τῆς πόλεως ὅπου κάλλιστον στρατοπεδεύσασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]in some places, [Refs 4th c.BC+] adjective, μέλη, ὅπου (i. e. ἐν οἷς)[Refs 5th c.BC+]: with other Particles, ὅκου δή somewhere or other, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅπου ἄν wherever, with subjunctive, [Refs]; in Trag. the ἄν may be omitted, as ὅπου δ᾽ Ἀπόλλων σκαιὸς ᾖ, τίνες σοφο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with genitive, ὅπου ἂν τύχῃ τῶν λεγομένων [Refs 5th c.BC+]anywheresoever, [Refs]; ὅπουπερ with optative, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁπουδάν, ={ὅπου δὲ ἄν}, anywhere, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ὁπουδήποτε, = ubicumque, Dosith.p.410 K; ὁπουδηποτοῦν anywheresoever, [Refs 1st c.AD+] I.2) in indirect questions, ὄφρα πύθηαι πατρός, ὅπου κύθε γαῖα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with Verbs of motion in pregnant sense, ὅκου ἐτράπετο, οὐκέτι εἶχον εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] mostly from codices; in repeating a question, ἡ Λακεδαίμων ποῦ 'στι; Answ. ὅπου 'στί; (do you ask) where it is? [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) the strict local sense occasionally passes into, II.1) a sense involving Time or Occasion, ὅ. τιν᾽ ἴδῃ [Refs 6th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅ. there is no case in which, i.e. in no case. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἔστιν ὅ; as a question, [Refs] II.2) of Cause, whereas, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅκου γε, Latin quandoquidem or quippe, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) later as a demonstrative adverb, only in the phrase ὅ. μέν, ὅ. δέ. here, there, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὅπου
Transliteration:
hópou
Pronounciation:
hop'-oo
Language:
Greek
not
Strongs:
Greek:
οὐ
Transliteration:
ou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
no
Morphhology:
Negative Particle Negative Negative
Grammar:
introducing a negative
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
οὐ
Transliteration:
ou
Gloss:
no
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין,אַיִן,לֹא;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf. μή); 1) absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. 2) Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς. οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל. לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ. ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2 o, al; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. 3) With another negative, (a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al; (b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. 4) With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog, Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. 5) Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
οὐ
Transliteration:
ou
Gloss:
no
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
οὐ, the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+] I) as the negative of single words, II) as the negative of the sentence. I) οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) as negativing the whole sentence, II.1) οὐ is frequently used alone, sometimes with the ellipsis of a definite Verb, οὔκ (i.e. ἀποκερῇ), ἄν γε ἐμοὶ πείθῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes as negativing the preceding sentence, [Refs 5th c.BC+] and the accusative; sometimes without μά, οὐ τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν πρόμον Ἅλιον [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) with indicative of statement, τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ φθίνει Κροίσου φιλόφρων ἀρετά [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.3) with subjunctive in future sense, only in Epic dialect, οὐ γάρ τίς με βίῃ γε ἑκὼν ἀέκοντα δίηται [Refs] II.4) with optative in potential sense (without ἄν or κεν), also Epic dialect, ὃ οὐ δύο γ᾽ ἄνδρε φέροιεν [Refs] II.5) with optative and ἄν, κείνοισι δ᾽ ἂν οὔ τις. μαχέοιτο [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6) in dependent clauses οὐ is used, II.6.a) with ὅτι or ὡς, after Verbs of saying, knowing, and showing, ἐκ μέν τοι ἐρέω. ὡς ἐγὼ οὔ τι ἑκὼν κατερύκομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so with indicative or optative and ἄν, ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μωροὶ ἦσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] in such sentences, see at {μή} [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6.b) in all causal sentences, and in temporal and Relat. sentences unless there is conditional or final meaning, χωσαμένη, ὅ οἱ οὔ τι θαλύσια. ῥέξε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in causal relative sentences, οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially in the combinations, οὐκ ἔστιν ὅστις οὐ, as οὐκ ἔστ᾽ ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅστις οὐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.6.c) after ὥστε with indicative or optative with ἄν, ὥστ᾽ οὐ δυνατόν σ᾽ εἵργειν ἔσται [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive is almost invariably due to indirect speech, ὥστ᾽ οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι (for οὐκ αἰσχύνονται) [Refs 5th c.BC+]—Rarely not in indirect speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.7) in a conditional clause μή is necessary, except, II.7.a) in [Refs 8th c.BC+] clause precedes the apodosis and the verb is indicative, εἰ δέ μοι οὐκ ἐπέεσσ᾽ ἐπιπείσεται [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.7.b) when the εἰ clause is really causal, as after Verbs expressing surprise or emotion, μὴ θαυμάσῃς, εἰ πολλὰ τῶν εἰρημένων οὐ πρέπει σοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.7.c) when οὐ belongs closely to the next word (see. [Refs 4th c.BC+], or is quoted unchanged, εἰ, ὡς νῦν φήσει, οὐ παρεσκευάσατο [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ δ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ ἐστί (i.e. ὥσπερ λέγεις), τίνι τρόπῳ διεφθάρη ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.8) οὐ is used with infinitive in indirect speech, when it represents the indicative of orat. recta, φαμὲν δέ οἱ οὐ τελέεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; sometimes we have οὐ and μή in consecutive clauses, οἶμαι σοῦ κάκιον οὐδὲν ἂν τούτων κρατύνειν μηδ᾽ ἐπιθύνειν χερί [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.9) οὐ is used with the participle, when it can be resolved into a finite sentence with οὐ, as after Verbs of knowing and showing, τὸν κατθανόνθ᾽ ὁρῶντες οὐ τιμώμενον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or into a causal sentence, τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or into a concessive sentence, δόξω γυναῖκα καίπερ οὐκ ἔχων ἔχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] and participle, ὡς οὐχὶ συνδράσουσα νουθετεῖς τάδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—for exceptions, see at {μή} [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.9.b) when the participle is used with the Article, μή is generally used, unless there is a distinct reference to a fact, when οὐ is occasionally found, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς οὐκ οὔσης ἔτι [πόλεως] ὁρμώμενοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.10) Adjectives and abstract Substantives with the article commonly take μή (see. μή [Refs 5th c.BC+] is occasionally used, τὰς οὐκ ἀναγκαίας πόσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν the non- dissolution of the bridges, the fact of their notbeing broken up, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so without the article, ἐν οὐ καιπῷ [Refs] II.11) for οὐ μή, see entry II.12) in questions οὐ ordinarily expects a positive answer, οὔ νυ καὶ ἄλλοι ἔασι.; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐχ ὁράᾳς.; dost thou not see? [NT+8th c.BC+]: the diphthong is genuine and always written ου (ουκ, ουδε, etc.) in early Inscrr, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οὐ abbreviated ο, Suid. see at {Φιλοξένου γραμμάτιον}. H) ACCENTUATION. οὐ is oxytone accusative to Hdn.Gr.1.494 (text doubtfulin 504): [Refs 8th c.BC+] H.I) οὐ in connexion with other Particles will be found in alphabetical order, οὐ γάρ, οὐ μή, etc.—The corresponding forms of μή should be compared.
Strongs
Word:
οὐ
Transliteration:
ou
Pronounciation:
ookh
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the absolute negative (compare g3361 (μή)) adverb; no or not; + long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, + nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but; a primary word
it should —
Strongs:
Lexicon:
δεῖ
Greek:
δεῖ,
Transliteration:
dei
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
be necessary
Morphhology:
Verb Present Active Indicative 3rd Singular
Grammar:
an ACTION that happens - by a person or thing being discussed
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
δεῖ
Transliteration:
dei
Gloss:
be necessary
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
δεῖ impersonal (δέω), [in LXX chiefly for infin. with לְ;] one must, it is necessary: with inf, Mat.26:54, Mrk.13:7, Act.5:29, al; with accusative and inf, Mat.16:21, Mrk.8:31, Jhn.3:7, Act.25:10, al; with ellipse of accusative, Mat.23:23; of accusative, and inf, Mrk.13:14, Rom.1:27 8:26; οὐ (μὴ) δεῖ (non licet), ought not, must not: Act.25:24, 2Ti.2:24; impf, ἔδει, of necessity or obligation in past time regarding a past event (Bl, § 63, 4), Mat.18:33, Luk.15:32, Jhn.4:4, Act.27:21, al; periphr, δέον ἐστίν (as in Attic, χρεών ἐστι = χρή, see: δέον), Act.19:36; id, with ellipse of ἐστίν, 1Pe.1:6 τὰ μὴ δέοντα (= ἃ οὐ δεῖ 1Ti.5:13. SYN.: ὀφείλει, expressing moral obligation, as distinct from δεῖ, denoting logical necessity and χρή, a need which results from the fitness of things (see Tr, Syn., § cvii, 10; Westc. on Heb.2:1, 1Jn.2:6; Hort on Jas.3:10). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
δεῖ
Transliteration:
dei
Gloss:
be necessary
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
δεῖ: subjunctive δέη, sometimes contraction δῆ (in codices of Comedy texts, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁπόσου κα δῆ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive δεῖ; participle δέον (see. infr. IV): imperfect ἔδει, Ionic dialect ἔδεε: future δεήσει [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist I ἐδέησε [Refs 5th c.BC+] —Impers. from δέω (A), there is need (the sense of moral obligation, properly belonging to χρή, is later, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I) c.accusative person et infinitive, it is needful for one to do, one must, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] why need the Argives fight? [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with nominative of the pronoun, ἡγούμην. δεῖν. μεγαλοψυχότερος φαίνεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with dative person, there is need of. for, θεοῖσι προσβαλεῖν χθονὶ ἄλλην δεήσει γαῖαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) with accusative of things et infinitive, δεῖ τι γενέσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἐπεὶ δέ οἱ ἔδεε κακῶς γενέσθαι since it was fated for him, since he was doomed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; for οἴομαι δεῖν, see at {οἴομαι}. I.3) absolutely with infinitive understood, μὴ πεῖθ᾽ ἃ μὴ δεῖ (i.e. πείθειν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴ τι δέοι, ἤν τι δέῃ (i.e. γενέσθαι), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν δέῃ (i.e. τροχάζειν), τροχάζῶ [Refs 6th c.BC+] II) with genitive of things, there is need of, frequently with negative, οὐδὲν ἂν δέοι πολλοῦ ἀργυρίου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes with infinitive added, μακροῦ λόγου δεῖ ταῦτ᾽ ἐπεξελθεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.b) frequently in phrases, πολλοῦ δεῖ there wants much, far from it, ὀλίγου δεῖ there wants little, all but; in full with infinitive, πολλοῦ δεῖ οὕτως ἔχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῦ πλεῦνος αἰεὶ ἔδεε there was always further to travel, [Refs 5th c.BC+] absolutely, in same sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) with dative person added, δεῖ μοί τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) with accusative person added, αὐτὸν γάρ σε δεῖ προμηθέως [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) rarely with Subj. in nominative, δεῖ μοί τι something is needful to me, ἓν δεῖ μόνον μοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) middle, δεῖται there is need, with genitive, δεῖταί σοι τῆς αὐτῆς ἐρωτήσεως [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with infinitive, ὥστε βραχἔ ἐμοὶ δεῖσθαι φράσαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] IV) neuter participle δέον (δεῖν is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, it being needful or fitting, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἀπήντα, δέον, he did not appear in court, though he ought to have done so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐδὲν δέον there being no need, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ὡς αὐτίκα δεῆσον διώκειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist δεῆσαν [Refs 2nd c.BC+] with accusative infinitive, [Refs 1st c.AD+] IV.2) substantive δέον, τό (see entry vocative).
Strongs
Word:
δεῖ
Transliteration:
deî
Pronounciation:
die
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
also deon deh-on'; neuter active participle of the same; both used impersonally; it is (was, etc.) necessary (as binding); behoved, be meet, must (needs), (be) need(-ful), ought, should; 3rd person singular active present of g1210 (δέω)
the [one]
Strongs:
Greek:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Nominative Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC male person or thing that is doing something
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
[that] which
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
reading
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἀναγινώσκω
Greek:
ἀναγινώσκων
Transliteration:
anaginōskōn
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to read
Morphhology:
Verb Present Active Participle Nominative Singular Masculine
Grammar:
an ACTION that is happening - done by a male person or thing that is doing something
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἀναγινώσκω
Transliteration:
anaginōskō
Gloss:
to read
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἀνα-γινώσκω (Attic ἀναγιγν-), [in LXX chiefly for קָרָא;] 1) to know certainly, know again, recognize. 2) Of written characters, to read: Mat.24:15, Mrk.13:14, Act.15:31 23:34, Eph.3:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:31, Mrk.12:10 Luk.6:3, Jhn.19:20, Act.8:30, 32, 2Co.1:13, Rev.1:3; with accusative of person(s), Ἠσαίαν τ. προφήτην, Act.8:28, 30; before ἐν, Mat.12:5 21:42, Mrk.12:26 (so. ἐν τ. νόμῳ), Luk.10:26; before ὅτι, Mat.19:4 21:16; τί ἐποίησε, Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25; pass. 2Co.3:2; of reading aloud (MM, VGT, see word), Luk.4:16, Act.13:27 15:21, 2Co.3:15, Col.4:16, 1Th.5:27 (M, Th., in l). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἀναγινώσκω
Transliteration:
anaginōskō
Gloss:
to read
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
Included with: ἀναγιγνώσκω, later ἀναγῑνώσκω: I) Epic dialect only in aorist 2 ἀνέγνων, I.1) know well, know certainly, οὐ γάρ πώ τις ἑὸν γόνον αὐτὸς ἀνέγνω[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.1.b) perceive, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] I.2) know again, recognize, [Refs 8th c.BC+], acknowledge, own, ἀναγνῶναι τοὺς συγγενέας[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist passive once in [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) after [Refs 8th c.BC+], future ἀναγνώσομαι uncertain in [Refs]: aorist 2 ἀνέγνων, Cretan dialect 3rd.pers.plural subjunctive -γνῶντι[Refs]perfect ἀνέγνωκα:—passive, future -γνωσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἀνεγνώσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀνέγνωσμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—of written characters, know them again, and so, read, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναγνώσεται (i.e. ὁ γραμματεύς) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, οἱ ἀναγιγνώσκοντες students, [Refs 1st c.AD+] ἀ. παρά τινι Ἀριστοτέλους τὰ περὶ ψυχῆς attend lectures on [Refs 4th c.BC+] —passive, τὰ βιβλία τὰ ἀνεγνωσμένα books read aloud, hence, published, opposed to τὰ ἀνέκδοτα, Lycon cited in [Refs 3rd c.AD+] III) Ionic dialect usage, causal, mostly in aorist ἀνέγνωσα, induce one to do a thing, τούτους. ἀναγνώσας ἕπεσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive is omitted, ὡς ἀνέγνωσε when he had persuaded him, [Refs]: once in present, ἀναγιγνώσκεις στρατεύεσθαι βασιλέα[Refs]; persuade, convince, ὅτι. [Refs 5th c.BC+] —aorist passive, ἀνεγνώσθην to be persuaded to do a thing, with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without infinitive, ὑπὸ τῆς γυναικὸς ἀναγνωσθείς[Refs]: pluperfect passive, ὡς οὗτοι. οἱ ἀνεγνωσμένοι ἦσαν[Refs]: rare in Attic dialect, ὑπὸ τῶν κυρίων ἀναγιγνωσκόμενον[Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ἀναγινώσκω
Transliteration:
anaginṓskō
Pronounciation:
an-ag-in-oce'-ko
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
he should understand —
Strongs:
Lexicon:
νοέω
Greek:
νοείτω,
Transliteration:
noeitō
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Verb Present Active Imperative 3rd Singular
Grammar:
an ACTION that certainly happens - by a person or thing being discussed
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
νοέω
Transliteration:
noeō
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
νοιεω νοέω, -ῶ (νοῦς), [in LXX chiefly for בִּין, also for שָׂכַל hi, etc;] 1) to perceive with the mind, understand (for the phrase νοῶν κ. φρονῶν, in wills, see MM, xvii): absol, Mat.16:9, Mrk.8:17; with accusative, Eph.3:4, 1Ti.1:7; with dative instr, τ. καρδίᾳ, Jhn.12:40; pass, Rom.1:20; before ὅτι, Mat.15:17 16:11, Mrk.7:18; with accusative and inf, Heb.11:8. 2) to think, consider: absol, Mat.24:15, Mrk.13:14, Eph.3:20; with accusative of thing(s), 2Ti.2:7 (cf. -εὐ, κατα, μετα, προ, ὑπο-νοέω). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
νοέω
Transliteration:
noeō
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
νο-έω, Aeolic dialect νόημι (which see): Epic dialect aorist 1 νόησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἔνωσα (ἐν-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect νενόηκα, Ionic dialect νένωκα (ἐν-) [Refs]; imperative νενόηθι Hilgard Excerpta e libris Herodiani [Refs]:—middle, Epic dialect aorist νοήσατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle νοησάμενος [Refs 7th c.BC+] —passive (mostly in middle sense), future νοηθήσομαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: aorist ἐνοήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also Ionic dialect (ἐπ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect νενόημαι, Ionic dialect νένωμαι [Refs 6th c.BC+]singular pluperfect ἐνένωτο (in middle sense) [Refs 5th c.BC+] and perfect passive νένοται. —The compounds with ἀπό, διά, ἐν, ἐπί, μετά, πρό are used chiefly in middle:—perceive by the eyes, observe (οἱ ἀρχαῖοι τὸ ν. σωματικὸν. ὑπολαμβάνουσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀξὺ ν.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀφθαλμοῖσιν, ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσι ν, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) perceive by the mind, apprehend, τὸν δὲ ἰδὼν ἐνόησε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἢ λάθετ᾽ ἢ οὐκ ἐνόησεν or did not take notice, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νοέεις δὲ καὶ αὐτός thou thyself art aware of it, [LXX+8th c.BC+]; πρὸ ὃ τοῦ ἐνόησεν one perceives before the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in Philos, of thought, μάλιστα ἔοικεν ἴδιον [ψυχῆς] τὸ ν. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with participle added, ὡς ἐνόησεν ἔμ᾽ ἥμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a future event, νοέω κακὸν ὔμμιν ἐρχόμενον [Refs]: with infinitive, οὐκ ἐνόησα ἄψορρον καταβῆναι [NT+8th c.BC+]:—middle, νωσάμενος [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—passive, to be apprehended by thought, τὰς ἰδέας νοεῖσθαι μὲν ὁρᾶσθαι δ᾽ οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ νοούμενα, opposed to τὰ αἰσθητά,[NT] 3) think, consider, reflect, φρεσὶ ν. ἔνθ᾽ εἴην ἢ ἔνθα” [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ν. look to both sides, [Refs 5th c.BC+] to be other wise minded, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: participle νοέων, έουσα, wary, discreet, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ νοέων λέγει what he says advisedly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νοῶν καὶ φρονῶν sane and in his right mind, in wills, [Refs 3rd c.BC+], etc:— in middle, φρενὶ θεῖα νοῦνται [Refs 6th c.BC+] 4) consider, deem, presume to be so and so, ὡς μηκέτ᾽ ὄντα κεῖνον. νόει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τόδε γὰρ νοῶ κράτιστον[Refs 4th c.BC+]infinitive, δεῖ νοῆσαι τὸ μὲν ὑγρὸν εἶναι[Refs]; compare νοητέον. II) think out, devise, conceive τοῦτό γ᾽ ἐναίσιμον οὐκ ἐνόησε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄλλα μὲν αὐτὸς ἐνὶ φρεσὶ σῇσι νοήσεις, ἄλλα δὲ καὶ δαίμων ὑποθήσεται[Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently with neuter plural adjective, πεπνυμένα πάντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄνδρων πλεῖστα νοησάμενος most cunning of men, of Sisyphus, [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—passive, ἐνθύμημα νενοημένον οὐκ ἀτόπως [Refs 1st c.BC+] II.2) purpose, intend, ἐσθλά τινι [Refs 8th c.BC+] III) with infinitive, to be minded, intend, οὐδ᾽ ἐνόησε ἐξερύσαι δόρυ bethought himself, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νοέω φρεσὶ τιμήςuσθαι[Refs]; ἦ γὰρ νοεῖς θάπτειν σφ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] he thought with himself to take the scourge, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐνέ- νωτο στρατεύειν he was minded to march, [Refs 5th c.BC+] IV) of words, bear a certain sense, mean, πυθοίμεθ᾽ ἂν τὸν χρησμὸν ὅ τι νοεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [εἰ] τοῦτο. νοεῖ αὐτῷ if this means for him that, [Refs]; τὸ νοούμενον the sense, meaning, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
νοιέω
Transliteration:
noiéō
Pronounciation:
noy-eh'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to exercise the mind (observe), i.e. (figuratively) to comprehend, heed; consider, perceive, think, understand; from g3563 (νοῦς)
then
Strongs:
Greek:
τότε
Transliteration:
tote
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Adverb
Grammar:
DESCRIBING a specific ACTION
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
τότε
Transliteration:
tote
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Adverb
Definition:
τότε, demonstr. adv. of time, correlat. of ὅτε, then, at that time; (a) of concurrent events: Mat.2:17 3:5 and freq, Rom.6:21; before ptcp, Mat.2:16, Gal.4:8; opposite to νῦν, Gal.4:29, Heb.12:26; ὁ τ. κόσμος, 2Pe.3:6; (b) of consequent events, then, thereupon: Mat.2:7 3:5 4:1 and freq, Luk.11:26; τ. οὖν, Jhn.11:14 19:1, 16 20:8; εὐθέως τ, Act.17:14; ὅτε. τ, Mat.13:26 21:1, Jhn.12:16; ἀπὸ τ, Mat.4:17 16:21 26:16, Luk.16:16; (with) of things future: Mat.24:28, 40 25:1, 31 ff; opposite to ἄρτι, 1Co.13:12; καὶ τ, Mat.7:23, Mrk.13:21, Luk.21:27, 1Co.4:5, al; ὅταν. τ, Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35, 1Th.5:3, al. (more frequently in Mt than in the rest of the NT). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
τότε
Transliteration:
tote
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Adverb
Definition:
τότε, Doric dialect τόκᾰ (which see) (both forms in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect τότᾰ [Refs 7th c.BC+] accusative to codices of [Refs 3rd c.BC+], compare ποτα, ὄτα):— adverb at that time, then, corresponding to Relat. ὅτε or ὁπότε (below [Refs]; mostly of some point in past time, opposed to νῦν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also of a future time, τότε κέν μιν. πεπίθοιμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] (or of imagined circumstances, in that case [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes, then, next, πρῶτον μὲν, εἶτα, καὶ τ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—in Trag. and Attic dialect also in indefinite sense, formerly, καὶ νῦν θ᾽ ὁμοίως καὶ τότ᾽ ἐξεπίσταμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]just now, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. μὲν, νῦν δὲ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]at one time or other, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) joined with other Particles, καὶ τ. even then, or (at the beginning of a clause) and then, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τ. δ᾽ ἤδη by that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλὰ τότ᾽ ἤδη when that time comes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with emphasis, τότ᾽ ἄρα τ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) with the Article, ἄνδρες οἱ τ. people then living, the men of that time, [NT+8th c.BC+] 4) εἰς τ. with future, on the day, then (see. εἰς [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐκ τ. or ἔκτοτε (which see) from that time, [NT+1st c.AD+] 5) in apodosi, answering to ὅτε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to ὅταν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to ὁππότε, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to ὁππότε κεν or ὁπότ᾽ ἂν δή, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to ἡνίκα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle, like {εἶτα}, πάντα ἐάσαντες καὶ μόνον οὐχὶ συγκατασκευάσαντες αὐτῷ τ. ζητήσομε; [Refs 4th c.BC+] after η ος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; after ὁππότε κεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also καὶ τ. δή after ἦμος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; after ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δή ῥα τ. after εὖτ᾽ ἄν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καὶ τότ᾽ ἔπειτα after ἦμος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II) later for ὅτε, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
τότε
Transliteration:
tóte
Pronounciation:
tot'-eh
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adverb
those
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
οἱ
Transliteration:
hoi
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Nominative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
SPECIFIC male people or things that are doing something
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
[those] which [are]
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
in
Strongs:
Greek:
ἐν
Transliteration:
en
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
in/on/among
Morphhology:
Preposition
Grammar:
relating it to another person or thing
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἐν
Transliteration:
en
Gloss:
in/on/among
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν, Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop, of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl; cf. Bl, §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω. ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom, Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen, Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl, §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ, ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr, II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας. ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll, εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). IV. Of time, (a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; (b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; (with) with art. inf, (α) present (so sometimes in cl, but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al; (β) aor, when, after: Luk.9:36, al; (d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἐν
Transliteration:
en
Gloss:
in/on/among
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
ἐν, poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag, εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs] ) PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into. A) WITH DAT. A.I) OF PLACE, A.I.1) in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of, ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.1.b) ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.I.2) elliptic, in such phrases as ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο [NT+8th c.BC+]; ἐν παιδοτρίβου, ἐν κιθαριστοῦ, at the school of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν γειτόνων (see. γείτων) ἐν αὑτοῦ (αὑτῷ codex Rav.) [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.3) in, within, surrounded by, οὐρανὸς ἐν αἰθέρι καὶ νεφέλῃσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ὅπλοισι in or under arms, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also of particular kinds of arms, ἐν τόξοις, ἀκοντίοις, etc, equipped with them, uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν μεγάλοις φορτίοις βαδίζειν καὶ τρέχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.4) on, at or by, ἐν ποταμῷ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νευρὴ ἐν τόξῳ the string on the bow, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατεκλάσθη ἐνὶ καυλῷ ἔγχος was broken off at or by the shaft,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν οἴνῳ at wine, probably in [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.I.5) in the number of, amongst, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and with Verbs of ruling, ἐν δ᾽ ἄρα τοῖσιν ἦρχ᾽ [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for ἐν τοῖς with _superlative_, V. ὁ. A.I.5.b) in the presence of, ἐν πᾶσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λέγειν ἐν ἀνδράσιν (of a woman) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a trial, διαγωνίζεσθαι, διαδικάζεσθαι ἔν τισι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.6) in one's hands, within one's reach or power, νίκης πείρατ᾽ ἔχονται ἐν ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσι [Refs 8th c.BC+], with infinitive, it depends on him to, rests with him to, ἔστιν ἐν σοὶ ἢ. ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἐν τούτῳ εἰσὶν πᾶσαι αἱ ἀποδείξεις depend on this, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔν γ᾽ ἐμοί so far as rests with me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἐν ἐμοί in my judgement, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν θεοῖς καλά in the eyes of the gods, [Refs] A.I.7) in respect of, ἐν πάντεσσ᾽ ἔργοισι δαήμονα φῶτα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν γήρᾳ σύμμετρός τινι in point of age, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἐμοὶ θρασύς in my case, towards me, [Refs]; ἡ ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις μάθησις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οὐδὲν δεινὸν μὴ ἐν ἐμοὶ στῇ stop with me, [Refs] A.I.8) in a pregnant construction with Verbs of motion, into; implying both motion to and subsequent position in a place, ἐν κονίῃσι χαμαὶ πέσεν fell [to the dust and lay] in it, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν στήθεσσι μένος βαλεῖν[Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Trag. and Attic dialect, ἐν ποίμναις πίτνων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν χωρίῳ ἐμπεπτωκώς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, with Verbs of coming and going, διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ [LXX+2nd c.AD+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.9) πίνειν ἐν ποτηρίῳ to drink from a cup, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.I.10) ἄργυρος ἐν ἐκπώμασι silver in the form of plate, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἐμ φέρνῃ, ἐν θέματι, as a dowry, pledge, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.I.11) in citations, ἐν τοῦ σκήπτρου τῇ παραδόσει in the passage of the [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II) OF STATE, CONDITION or POSITION: A.II.1) of outward circumstances, ἐν πολέμῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν γένει εἶναί τινι to be related to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of occupations, pursuits, ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ εἶναι to be engaged in philosophy, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἐν ποιήσι γενόμενοι poets, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἐν τοῖς πράγμασι ministers of state, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ ἐν τέλει the magistrates, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μάντις ἦν ἐν τῇ τέχνῃ in the practice of it, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) of inward states, of feeling, etc, ἐν φιλότητι, ἐν δοιῇ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν τινά to make him the object of one's anger, [Refs 5th c.BC+] to blame him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶναι to have the blame, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) frequently with neuter adjective, ἐν βραχεῖ, ={βραχέως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τάχει, ={ταχέως}, [Refs]; ἐν καλῷ ἐστί, ={καλῶς ἔχει}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ [ἐστί] [Refs]; ἐν εὐμαρεῖ [ἐστί] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ, ={ἴσως, ἐν ὁμοίῳ}, ={ὁμοίως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν κενοῖς, ={κενῶς}, [Refs] substantive, ἐν δίκᾳ, ={δικαίως}, opposed to παρὰ δίκαν[Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) OF THE INSTRUMENT, MEANS or MANNER, ἐν πυρὶ πρήσαντες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but in most cases the originally sense may be traced, to put in the fire and burn, infetters and bind, etc; so ἐν πόνοις δαμέντα [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔζευξα πρῶτος ἐν ζυγοῖσι κνώδαλα[Refs]; also ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν or ἐν ὄμμασιν ὁρᾶσθαι, ἰδέσθαι, to see with or before one's eyes, i.e. have the object in one's eye, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also ἐν λιταῖς by prayers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν δόλῳ by deceit, [Refs]; ἐν λόγοις by words, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially with Verbs of showing, σημαίνειν ἐν ἱεροῖς καὶ οἰωνοῖς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ πραχθέντα. ἐν. ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε ye know by letters, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) of a personal instrument, ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια [NT] A.IV) OF TIME, ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν τούτῳ (i.e. τῷ χρόνῶ) in this space of time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ᾧ (i.e. χρόνῳ) during the time that, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς in the time of the truce, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the course of the mysteries, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τραγῳδοῖς at the performance of, [Refs 4th c.BC+] A.IV.b) ἐν ἄρχοντι Μητροδώρῳ during the archonship of M, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] A.IV.2) in, within, ἐν ἡμέρῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μυρίαις ἐν ἁμέραις in, i.e. after, countless days, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) OF NUMBERS generally, ἐν δυσὶ σταδίοις within two stadia, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V.2) with genitive of price, ἐν δύο ταλάντων [LXX] A.V.3) amounting to, προῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B) WITH Acc, into, on, for, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; also poetry, ἐν πάντα νόμον [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) WITHOUT CASE, AS adverb, in the phrase ἐν δέ, C.1) and therein, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.2) and among them, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.3) and besides, moreover (not in Attic dialect Prose), [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.4) ἔνι, ={ἔνεστι, ἔνεισι}, [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) POSITION: ἐν frequently stands between its substantive and the adjective agreeing therewith, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without an adjective, τῷ δ᾽ ἐν ἐρινεός ἐστι μέγας [Refs 8th c.BC+] between substantive and genitive, χόρτοις ἐν λέοντος [Refs]--One or more independent words sometimes come between the preposition and its dative, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) IN COMPOSITION (joined with other words), E.I) with Verbs, the preposition mostly retains its sense of being in or at a place, etc, with dative, or followed by εἰς, or ἐν: in such forms as ἐνορᾶν τινί τι, in translating, we resolve the compound, to remark a thing in one. E.I.b) also, at a person, ἐγγελᾶν, ἐνυβρίζειν τινί. E.I.2) with adjectives, it expresses E.I.2.a) a modified degree, as in ἔμπηλος, ἔμπικρος, ἔνσιμος, rather. E.I.2.b) the possession of a quality, as in ἔναιμος with blood in it, ἐνάκανθος thorny: ἔμφωνος with a voice: ἔννομος in accordance with law, etc. E.II) ἐν becomes ἐμ- before the labials β μ π φ ; ἐγ- before the gutturals γ κ ξ ; ἐλ- before ; ἐρ- before ; rarely ἐσ- before ; but Inscrr. and Papyri often preserve ἐν- in all these cases.
Strongs
Word:
ἐν
Transliteration:
en
Pronounciation:
en
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Preposition
Definition:
"in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.; about, after, against, + almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+ all means), for (… sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to, -wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly, one, X quickly, X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on), through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while, with(-in); a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between g1519 (εἰς) and g1537 (ἐκ))
<the>
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τῇ
Transliteration:
tēa
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Dative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a specific female person or thing that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
Judea
Strongs:
Lexicon:
Ἰουδαία
Greek:
Ἰουδαίᾳ
Transliteration:
Ioudaia
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Dative Singular Feminine Location
Grammar:
a female LOCATION that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Additional:
Judea @ Ezr.9.9
Tyndale
Word:
Ἰουδαία
Origin:
the Greek of h3063N
Transliteration:
Ioudaia
Gloss:
Judea
Morphhology:
Proper Name Noun Female Location
Definition:
§ Judea, Judean, "land of the Judahites" Judea, the southern party of the country, below Samaria, Mt. 2:1, 5, 22; 3:1; metonymy the inhabitants of Judea
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
Ἰουδαία
Origin:
the Greek of h3063N
Transliteration:
Ioudaia
Gloss:
Judea
Morphhology:
Proper Name Noun Female Location
Definition:
Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jewish man: Ἰουδαία, a Jewish woman; ἡ Ἰουδαία (i.e. γῆ) “Judaea”: —Ἰουδα-ϊκός, ή, όν, “Jewish”, [LXX] adverb -κῶς [NT+1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
Ἰουδαία
Transliteration:
Ioudaía
Pronounciation:
ee-oo-dah'-yah
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Location
they should flee
Strongs:
Lexicon:
φεύγω
Greek:
φευγέτωσαν
Transliteration:
pheugetōsan
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to flee
Morphhology:
Verb Present Active Imperative 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that certainly happens - by people or things being discussed
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
φεύγω
Transliteration:
pheugō
Gloss:
to flee
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
φεύγω [in LXX chiefly for נוּס, also for בָּרַח, etc;] to flee from or away, take flight: absol, Mat.8:33 26:56, Mrk.5:14 14:50, Luk.8:34, Jhn.10:12, Act.7:29; before εἰς, Mat.2:13 10:23 24:16 (WH, txt.), Mrk.13:14, Luk.21:21, Rev.12:6; ἐπί, with accusative loc, Mat.24:16 (WH, mg.); ἐκ, Act.27:30; ἀπό, with genitive loc. (cl.), Mrk.16:8; id. with genitive of person(s) (as in Heb.), Jhn.10:5, Jas.4:7. Metaphorical: absol, Rev.16:20; with accusative of thing(s), 1Co.6:18, Heb.11:34 (see M, Fr, 116); opposite to διώκειν, 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.2:22; before άπό, with genitive of person(s), Rev.9:6; άπὸ τ. προσώπου, Rev.20:11; with genitive of thing(s), Mat.3:7 (M, Pr., l.with) Mat.23:33, Luk.3:7, 1Co.10:14 (cf. ἀπο, δια, ἐκ, κατα-φεύγω). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
φεύγω
Transliteration:
pheugō
Gloss:
to flee
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
φεύγω, [Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive φευγέμεν, φευγέμεναι, [Refs]; imperfect ἔφευγον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future φεύξομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also φευξοῦμαι in [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but uncertain where found in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φευξεῖται is uncertain reading in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; future active ἐκ-φεύξω only late, variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἔφῠγον, Ionic dialect φύγεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέφευγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; optative πεφεύγοι [Refs 8th c.BC+], participle πεφευγότες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle perfect passive πεφυγμένος in active sense, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect πεφυζότες (compare φύζα) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect πεφύγγων, see at {φυγγάνω}:—middle, μὴ φεύγησθε Anon.Hist. in [Refs]aorist 1 δια-φεύξασθαι Decrees [Refs 5th c.BC+] I) absolutely, flee, take flight, opposed to διώκω, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐκ πολέμοιο, ἐκ θανάτοιο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ Σάρδεων, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἑλικῶνα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] ran the course full swiftly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. τὴν παρὰ θάλασσαν (i.e. ὁδόν) flee by the shore route, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; for φυγῇ φεύγειν, see[Refs] I.2) present and imperfect tenses properly express only the purpose or endeavour to get away: hence participle φεύγων is added to the compound Verbs καταφεύγω, ἐκφεύγω, προφεύγω, to distinguish the attempt from the accomplishment, βέλτερον, ὃς φεύγων προφύγῃ κακὸν ἠὲ ἁλώῃ it is better that one should flee and escape than stay and be caught, [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.3) φ. εἰς. have recourse to. take refuge in, ἐς τοὺς ἀφώνους μάρτυρας [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.4) with infinitive, shun or shrink from doing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with infinitive omitted, φεύγουσι γάρ τοι χοἱ θρασεῖς shrink back, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) with accusative, flee, avoid, escape, Ἕκτορα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔφυγον κακόν, εὗρον ἄμεινον, formula used by μύσται, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; with modal dative, φ. ὄνειδος λόγοις, ἀμαχανίαν ἔργῳ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; avoid, shun, χρὴ. φεύγειν τὰ παχύνοντα [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; φόνον φ. flee the consequences of the murder, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδεμία [πόλις] πέφευγε (sed perhaps to be read ἀπέφυγε) δουλοσύνην πρὸς Ἱπποκράτεος at the hands of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: participle perfect passive also retains the accusative in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in periphrastic phrases, μοῖραν δ᾽ οὔ τινά φημι πεφυγμένον ἔμμεναι ἀνδρῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+] — but in passive sense, τὸ πάραυτα πεφυγμένον κακόν Epicur. [prev. cited] II.b) seek to avoid, shirk, στρατείαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; so in aorist, ἢν φύγῃ τις, ζημιοῦν [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) of things, ἡνίοχον φύγον ἡνία escaped, slipped from his hands, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ φεῦγον the part which slips, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2.b) of wine, 'go off', turn sour, [Refs] III) flee one's country, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἱ φεύγοντες the exiles, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐξ Ἀθηνέων, ἐκ τῆς πατρίδος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) φ. ὑπὸ Σκυθέων to be expelled, driven out by. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but especially to be exiled, φ. ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. ἐξ Ἀρείου πάγου by their sentence, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.3) absolutely, go into exile, live in banishment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. ἀειφυγίαν to be banished for life, [Refs]; φεόγειν Ἀμφίπολιν ἀειφυγίην [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but also ἐν ἀειφυγίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φεύγοντες being in exile, opposed to φυγόντες having gone into exile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with play on words, “μέχρι τίνος φεύξῃ, Ἀρκαδίω; καὶ ὅς, ἔς τ᾽ ἂν τοὺς ἀφίκωμαι οἳ οὐκ ἴσασι Φίλιππον” [Refs 4th c.BC+] IV) as law-term (mostly in present and imperfect, but[Refs 5th c.BC+], to be accused or prosecuted at law: ὁ φεύγων the accused, defendant, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with accusative, φ. γραφάς, δίκην, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the crime being added in genitive, φόνου δίκην φ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; more frequently with genitive only, φ. φόνου to be charged with murder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with genitive of the penalty, ἐὰν. φεύγῃ δεσμῶν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; also περὶ θανάτου φ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀσεβείας φ. ὑπό τινος is accused of impiety by, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; rarely of things, τὸ φεῦγον ψήφισμα the decree that is on its defence, the decree in question, [Refs 5th c.BC+] has the older sense, flee from a charge, quit one's country on account of a charge. IV.2) plead in defence, δεῖ τοί σε φεύγειν. ὡς οὐκ ἔχουσι κῦρος [οἱ νόμοι] [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔφευγε μὴ εἰδέναι pleaded ignorance, [Refs 5th c.BC+], (Cf. Latin fugio, Gothic biugan 'bend', etc.)
Strongs
Word:
φεύγω
Transliteration:
pheúgō
Pronounciation:
fyoo'-go
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to run away (literally or figuratively); by implication, to shun; by analogy, to vanish; escape, flee (away); apparently a primary verb
to
Strongs:
Greek:
εἰς
Transliteration:
eis
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
toward
Morphhology:
Preposition
Grammar:
relating it to another person or thing
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
εἰς
Transliteration:
eis
Gloss:
toward
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). I. Of place. 1) After verbs of motion; (a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al; (b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al; (with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al; (d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; (e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ, Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. 2) Of direction; (a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al; (b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. 3) After verbs of rest; (a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl; see WM, 516; Bl, §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al; (b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl, M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. II. Of time, for, unto; 1) accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ, Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. 2) Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl, but more frequently in late Gk, εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss, BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl, §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
εἰς
Transliteration:
eis
Gloss:
toward
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
ἐν εἰς or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to: I) OF PLACE, the oldest and commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently of places, to, εἰς Εὔβοιαν [Refs]; ἐς Αἴγυπτον, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς Μίλητον into the territory of Miletus,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἅρματα βαίνειν to step into, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to ἐκ, in such phrases as ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης, ἐς πόδας ἐκ κεφαλῆς, from heel to ankle-joint, from head to foot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κἠς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: with Verbs implying motion or direction, as of looking, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, [Refs], etc; εἰς ὦπα ἔοικεν he is like in face (i.e. ἰδόντι), [Refs], etc; ἐς ὀφθαλμούς τινος ἐλθεῖν to come before another's eyes,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς ταὐτὸν ἥκειν come to the same point, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: less frequently after a substantive, ὁδὸς ἐς λαύρην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐς Παλλήνην τεῖχος facing Pallene, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.b) Epic dialect and Ionic dialect, also with accusative person (Attic dialect ὡς, πρός, παρά), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Attic dialect with collective Nouns, ἐς τὸν δῆμον παρελθόντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially of consulting an oracle, ἐς θεὸν ἐλθεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) with Verbs expressing restin a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκεν ἐπὶ θρόνου he put it in the house (i.e. he brought it into the house, and put it there), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς θρόνους ἕζοντο they sat them down upon the seats, [Refs]; ἐφάνη λὶς εἰς ὁδόν the lion appeared in the path, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀπόβασιν ποιήσασθαι ἐς. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later used like{ἐν}, τὴν γῆν εἰς ἣν ὑμεῖς κατοικεῖτε [LXX+1st c.BC+]: generally, τοὔνομα εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, φασίν, Ἱππομιγὴς δύναται [Refs 2nd c.AD+] I.3) with Verbs of saying or speaking, εἰς relates to the persons to or before whom one speaks, εἰπεῖν ἐς πάντας, ἐς πάντας αὔδα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with other Verbs, εἰς τοὺς Ἕλληνας σαυτὸν σοφιστὴν παρέχων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπαχθὴς ἦν ἐς τοὺς πολλούς [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.4) elliptical usages, I.4.a) after Verbs which have no sense of motion to or into a place, τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρόν they quitted the city for a strong position, i.e. to seek a strong position, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γράμματα ἑάλωσαν εἰς Ἀθήνας letters were captured [and sent] to Athens, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.4.b) participles signifying motion are frequently omitted with εἰς, τοῖς στρατηγοῖς τοῖς εἰς Σικελίαν (i.e. ἀποδειχθεῖσιν) [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.4.c) with genitive, mostly of proper names, as εἰς Ἀΐδαο, Attic dialect εἰς Ἅιδου [δόμους], [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς Ἀθηναίης [ἱερόν] to the temple of Athena, [Refs]; εἰς Αἰγύπτοιο [ῥόον] [Refs 8th c.BC+] to a rich man's house, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πέμπειν εἰς διδασκάλων send to school, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) OF TIME, II.1) to denote a certain point or limit of time, up to, until, ἐς ἠῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα till sunset, [Refs]towards or near sunset,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς ἐμέ up to my time, [Refs 5th c.BC+] against the time when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς πότ; until when? how long? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς τ; ={εἰς πότε}; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς ὅ until, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) to determine a period, εἰς ἐνιαυτόν for a year, i.e. a whole year, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; within the year,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς θέρος ἢ ἐς ὀπώρην for the summer, i.e. throughout it, [Refs]; ἡ εἰς ἐνιαυτὸν κειμένη δαπάνη εἰς τὸν μῆνα δαπανᾶται the expenditure for a year is expended in the month, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἑσπέραν ἥκειν to come at even, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς τρίτην ἡμέραν or εἰς τρίτην alone, on the third day, in two days, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς τέλος at last, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς καιρόν in season, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐς ἀναβολάς, ἀμβολάς, with no delay, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς τότε at this time, variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+] at that time (in the future), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς ὕστερον or τὸ ὕστερον, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (; ἐς αὐτίκα μάλ᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἔπειτα (see. εἰσέπειτα (; ἐς τὸ ἔ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἅπαξ, see at {εἰσάπα; εἰς ἔτι}, see at {εἰσέτι}. III) to express MEASURE OR LIMIT, without reference to Time, ἐς δίσκουρα λέλειπτο was left behind as far as a quoit's throw, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς δραχμὴν διέδωκε paid them as much as a drachma, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐς τὰ μάλιστα to the greatest degree, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς ὅ ἐμέμνηντο so far as they remembered, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) frequently with Numerals, ἐς τριακάδας δέκα ναῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ναῦς ἐς τὰς τετρακοσίας, διακοσίας, to the number of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἕνα, εἰς δύο, εἰς τέσσαρας, one, two, four deep, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but εἰς τέσσαρας four abreast, [Refs 4th c.BC+] thrice, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of round numbers, about, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.3) distributive, εἰς φυλάς by tribes, [LXX] III.4) IV) to express RELATION, towards, in regard to, ἐξαμαρτεῖν εἰς θεούς [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἁμάρτημα εἴς τινα, αἰτίαι ἐς ἀλλήλους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγειν ἐς. [Refs 5th c.BC+] IV.b) of the subject of a work, especially in titles, e.g. τὰ ἐς Ἀπολλώνιον [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of the object of a dedication, as in titles of hymns, ἐπινίκια, etc. IV.2) in regard to, πρῶτος εἰς εὐψυχίαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in respect of, εὐτυχεῖν ἐς τέκνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς τὰ ἄλλα Th.I.I; εἰς ἄπαντα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τό γ᾽ εἰς ἑαυτόν, τὸ εἰς ἐμέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; for τελεῖν ἐς Ἕλληνας, Βοιωτούς, ἄνδρας, etc, see at {τελέω}. IV.3) of Manner, ἐς τὸν νῦν τρόπον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς τὸ πᾶν, ={πάντως}, [Refs]; ἐς τάχος, ={ταχέως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς εὐτέλειαν, ={εὐτελῶς}, [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) ofan end or limit, ἔρχεσθαι, τελευτᾶν, λήγειν ἐς, to end in, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καταξαίνειν ἐς φοινικίδα to cut into red rags, [NT+5th c.BC+]; εἰς ἄνδρας ἐκ μειρακίων τελευτᾶν, εἰς ἄνδρα γενειᾶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] to form a predicate, ἔσται εἰς ἔθνη [LXX]; πιστὸς (i.e. ἦν) εἰς προφήτην [LXX+NT] V.2) of Purpose or Object, εἰπεῖν εἰς ἀγαθόν, πείσεται εἰς ἀγαθόν, for good, for his good, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς φόβον to cause fear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς κάλλος ζῆν to live for show, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς τὸ πρᾶγμα εἶναι to be pertinent, to the purpose, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently of expenditure on an object, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) POSITION: εἰς is sometimes parted from its accusative by several words, εἰς ἀμφοτέρω Διομήδεος ἅρματα βήτην [Refs 8th c.BC+] put after its case, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: after an adverb, αὔριον ἔς· τῆμος δὲ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
εἰς
Transliteration:
eis
Pronounciation:
ice
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Preposition
Definition:
to or into (indicating the point reached or entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.); also in adverbial phrases; (abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at, (back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore, + forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), …ward, (where-)fore, with; a primary preposition
the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τὰ
Transliteration:
ta
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
SPECIFIC neuter people or things that are having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
mountains;
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὄρος
Greek:
ὄρη·
Transliteration:
orē
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
mountain
Morphhology:
Noun Accusative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
neuter PEOPLE OR THINGS that are having something done to them
Source:
[Tag=NKO] Identical in Nestlé-Aland, KJV, and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὄρος
Transliteration:
oros
Gloss:
mountain
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
ὄρος, -ους, τό [in LXX chiefly, and very freq, for הַר;] a mountain: Mat.4:8 17:1, Mrk.9:2, Jhn.4:20, 2Pe.1:18, al; opposite to βουνός, Luk.3:5 (LXX); ὄ. τ. ἐλαιῶν, Mat.21:1 24:3, al. (see: ἐ.); ὄ. Σιών (Σ, prob. in gem appos.), Heb.12:22, Rev.14:1; ὄ. Σινά, Act.7:30, 38 Gal.4:24-25; τὸ ὄ, of the hill district as distinct from the lowlands, esp. the hills above the Sea of Galilee, Mat.5:1 8:1, Mrk.3:13 6:46, al; τὰ ὄ, Mat.18:12, Mrk.5:5, Heb.11:38, Rev.6:14, al; proverbially (cf. Rabbinic, הדים עקר), of overcoming difficulties, accomplishing marvels, ὄρη μεθιστάνειν, 1Co.13:2, cf. Mat.17:20 21:21, Mrk.11:23 (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὄρος
Transliteration:
oros
Gloss:
mountain
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
ὄρος, εος, τό: genitive plural ὀρέων (the form proper to Ionic dialect and other dialects) is required by the metre in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is alone used in [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; but ὀρῶν (the Attic dialect form) is required in [Refs 5th c.BC+] for the sake of meter| in Doric dialect, [Refs 8th c.BC+], see at {ὄρειος} (οὔρεσιν is an Epicism in [Refs 7th c.BC+] at end of a hexameter, [Refs]; ὄρος is found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] and should perhaps be restored elsewhere:—mountain, hill, ὄρεος κορυφῇσι [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) canton, parish, ὄ. Ἀργειατᾶν, ὄ. Ὀγχνιάἱον, etc, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 3) in Egypt, desert, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; as place of burial, [Refs 1st c.AD+] 4) part of the foot, ={τὸ ἄνω πρὸ τῶν δακτύλων}, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] 5) ={ἀμίς}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ὄρος
Transliteration:
óros
Pronounciation:
or'-os
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Neuter
